OLD | NEW |
---|---|
(Empty) | |
1 =============================== | |
2 Contents Of PNaCl Bitcode Files | |
3 =============================== | |
4 | |
5 .. contents:: | |
6 :local: | |
7 :backlinks: none | |
8 :depth: 3 | |
9 | |
10 | |
11 Introduction | |
12 ============ | |
13 | |
14 This document is a reference manual for the contents of PNaCl bitcode files. We | |
15 define bitcode files via three layers. The first layer is presented using | |
16 assembly language *PNaClAsm*, and defines the textual form of the bitcode | |
17 file. The textual form is then lowered to a sequence of :ref:`PNaCl | |
18 records<link_for_pnacl_records>`. The final layer applies abbreviations that | |
19 convert each PNaCl record into a corresponding sequence of bits. | |
20 | |
21 .. image:: /images/PNaClBitcodeFlow.png | |
22 | |
23 PNaClAsm uses a *static single assignment* (SSA) based representation that | |
24 requires generated results to have a single (assignment) source. | |
25 | |
26 PNaClAsm focuses on the semantic content of the file, not the bit-encoding of | |
27 that content. However, it does provide annotations that allow one to specify how | |
28 the :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` are used to convert | |
29 PNaCl records into the sequence of bits. | |
30 | |
31 Each construct in PNaClAsm defines a corresponding :ref:`PNaCl | |
32 record<link_for_pnacl_records>`. A PNaCl bitcode file is simply a sequence of | |
33 PNaCl records. The goal of PNaClAsm is to make records easier to read, and not | |
34 to define a high-level user programming language. | |
35 | |
36 PNaCl records are an abstract encoding of structured data, similar to XML. Like | |
37 XML, A PNaCl record has a notion of a tag (i.e. the first element in a record, | |
38 called a *code*). PNaCl records can be nested. Nesting is defined by a | |
39 corresponding :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` and | |
40 :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` block record. | |
41 | |
42 These block records must be used like balanced parentheses to define the block | |
43 structure that is imposed on top of records. Each exit record must be preceded | |
44 by a corresponding enter record. Blocks can be nested by nesting enter/exit | |
45 records appropriately. | |
46 | |
47 The *PNaCl bitcode writer* takes the sequence of records, defined by a PNaClAsm | |
48 program, and converts each record into a (variable-length) sequence of bits. The | |
49 output of each bit sequence is appended together. The resulting generated | |
50 sequence of bits is the contents of the PNaCl bitcode file. | |
51 | |
52 For every kind of record, there is a method for converting records into bit | |
53 sequences. These methods correspond to a notion of | |
54 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>`. Each abbreviation defines | |
55 a specific bit sequence conversion to be applied. | |
56 | |
57 Abbreviations can be user defined, but there are also predefined defaults. All | |
58 user-specified abbreviations are included in the generated bitcode | |
59 file. Predefined defaults are not. | |
60 | |
61 Each abbreviation defines how a record is converted to a bit sequence. The | |
62 :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` uses these abbreviations | |
63 to convert the bit sequence back to the corresponding sequence of PNaCl records. | |
64 As a result, all records have an abbreviation (user or default) associated with | |
65 them. | |
66 | |
67 Conceptually, abbreviations are used to define how to pack the contents of | |
68 records into bit sequences. The main reason for defining abbreviations is to | |
69 save space. The default abbreviations are simplistic and are intended to handle | |
70 all possible records. The default abbreviations do not really worry about being | |
71 efficient, in terms of the number of bits generated. | |
72 | |
73 By separating the concepts of PNaCl records and abbreviations, the notion of | |
74 data compression is cleanly separated from semantic content. This allows | |
75 different use cases to decide how much effort should be spent on compressing | |
76 records. | |
77 | |
78 For a JIT compiler that produces bitcode, little (if any) compression should be | |
79 applied. In fact, the API to the JIT may just be the records themselves. The | |
80 goal of a JIT is to perform the final translation to machine code as quickly as | |
81 possible. | |
82 | |
83 On the other hand, when delivering across the web, one may want to compress the | |
84 sequence of bits considerably, to reduce costs in delivering web pages. Note | |
85 that :ref:`pnacl-compress<pnacl_compress>` is provided as part of the SDK to do | |
86 this job. | |
87 | |
88 Data Model | |
89 ========== | |
90 | |
91 The data model for PNaCl bitcode is fixed at little-endian ILP32: pointers are | |
92 32 bits in size. 64-bit integer types are also supported natively via the i64 | |
93 type (for example, a front-end can generate these from the C/C++ type ``long | |
94 long``). | |
95 | |
96 Integers are assumed to be modeled using two's complement. Floating point | |
97 support is fixed at :ref:`IEEE 754<c_cpp_floating_point>` 32-bit and 64-bit | |
98 values (float and double, respectively). | |
99 | |
100 PNaCl Blocks | |
101 ============ | |
102 | |
103 Blocks are used to organize records in the bitcode file. The kinds of blocks | |
104 defined in PNaClAsm are: | |
105 | |
106 Module block | |
107 A top-level block defining the program. The :ref:`module | |
108 block<link_for_module_block>` defines global information used by the program, | |
109 followed by function blocks defining the implementation of functions within | |
110 the program. All other blocks (listed below) must appear within a module | |
111 block. | |
112 | |
113 Types block | |
114 The :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>` defines the set of types | |
115 used by the program. All types used in the program must be defined in the | |
116 types block. These types consist of primitive types as well as high level | |
117 constructs such as vectors and function signatures. | |
118 | |
119 Globals block | |
120 The :ref:`globals block<link_for_globals_block_section>` defines the set of | |
121 global addresses of global variables and constants used by the program. It | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"global addresses of global variables" - is the fi
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Yes. All global variables and addresses must appea
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/19 21:12:00
Per our offline discussion, I think we both agree
| |
122 also defines how each global (associated with the global address) is | |
123 initialized. | |
124 | |
125 Valuesymtab block | |
126 The :ref:`valuesymtab block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>` defines | |
127 textual names for external function addresses. | |
128 | |
129 Function block | |
130 Each function (implemented) in a program has its own :ref:`function | |
131 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` that defines the implementation of | |
132 the corresponding function. | |
133 | |
134 Constants block | |
135 Each implemented function that uses constants in its instructions defines a | |
136 :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`. Constants blocks | |
137 appear within the corresponding function block of the implemented function. | |
138 | |
139 Abbreviations block | |
140 Defines global abbreviations that are used to compress PNaCl records. The | |
141 :ref:`abbreviations block<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>` is segmented | |
142 into multiple sections, one section for each kind of block. This block appears | |
143 at the beginning of the module block. | |
144 | |
145 This section is only intended as a high-level discussion of blocks. Later | |
146 sections will dive more deeply into the constraints on how blocks must be laid | |
147 out. This section only presents the overall concepts of what kinds of data are | |
148 stored in each of the blocks. | |
149 | |
150 A PNaCl program consists of a :ref:`header | |
151 record<link_for_header_record_section>` and a :ref:`module | |
152 block<link_for_module_block>`. The header record defines a sequence of bytes | |
153 uniquely identifying the file as a bitcode file. The module block defines the | |
154 program to run. | |
155 | |
156 Each block, within a bitcode file, defines values. These values are associated | |
157 with IDs. Each type of block defines different kinds of IDs. The | |
158 :ref:`module<link_for_module_block>`, | |
159 :ref:`types<link_for_types_block_section>`, | |
160 :ref:`globals<link_for_globals_block_section>`, and | |
161 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>` blocks define global | |
162 identifiers, and only a single instance can appear. The | |
163 :ref:`function<link_for_function_blocks_section>` and | |
164 :ref:`constant<link_for_constants_block_section>` blocks define local | |
165 identifiers, and can have multiple instances (one for each implemented | |
166 function). | |
167 | |
168 The only records in the module block that define values, are :ref:`function | |
169 address<link_for_function_address_section>` records. Each function address | |
170 record defines a different function address, and the :ref:`type | |
171 signature<link_for_function_type>` associated with that function address. | |
172 | |
173 Each :ref:`function block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` defines the | |
174 implementation of a single function. Each function block defines the | |
175 intermediate representation of the function, consisting of basic blocks and | |
176 instructions. If constants are used within instructions, they are defined in a | |
177 :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`, nested within the | |
178 corresponding function block. | |
179 | |
180 All function blocks are associated with a corresponding function address. This | |
181 association is positional rather than explicit. That is, the Nth function block | |
182 in a module block corresponds to the Nth | |
183 :ref:`defining<link_for_function_address_section>` (rather than declared) | |
184 function address record in the module block. | |
185 | |
186 Hence, within a function block, there is no explicit reference to the function | |
187 address the block defines. For readability, PNaClAsm uses the corresponding | |
188 function signature, associated with the corresponding function address record, | |
189 even though that data does not appear in the corresponding records. | |
190 | |
191 .. _link_for_pnacl_records: | |
192 | |
193 PNaCl Records | |
194 ============= | |
195 | |
196 A PNaCl record is a non-empty sequence of unsigned, 64-bit, integers. A record | |
197 is identified by the record *code*, which is the first element in the | |
198 sequence. Record codes are unique within a specific kind of block, but are not | |
199 necessarily unique across different kinds of blocks. The record code acts as the | |
200 variant discriminator (i.e. tag) within a block, to identify what kind of record | |
201 it is. | |
202 | |
203 Record codes that are local to a specific kind of block are small values | |
204 (starting from zero). In an ideal world, they would be a consecutive sequence of | |
205 integers, starting at zero. However, the reality is that PNaCl records evolved | |
206 over time (and actually started as `LLVM records | |
207 <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_). For backward compatibility, | |
208 obsolete numbers have not been reused, leaving gaps in the actual record code | |
209 values used. | |
210 | |
211 Global record codes are record codes that have the same meaning in multiple | |
212 kinds of blocks. To separate global record codes from local record codes, large | |
213 values are used. Currently there are four :ref:`global record | |
214 codes<link_for_global_record_codes>`. To make these cases clear, and to leave | |
215 ample room for future growth in PNaClAsm, these special records have record | |
216 codes close to the value 2\ :sup:`16`\ . Note: Well-formed PNaCl bitcode files | |
217 do not have record codes >= 2\ :sup:`16`\ . | |
218 | |
219 A PNaCl record is denoted as follows: :: | |
220 | |
221 a: <v0, v1, ... , vN> | |
222 | |
223 The value ``v0`` is the record code. The remaining values, ``v1`` through | |
224 ``vN``, are parameters that fill in additional information needed by the | |
225 construct it represents. All records must have a record code. Hence, empty PNaCl | |
226 records are not allowed. ``a`` is the index to the abbreviation used to convert | |
227 the record to a bit sequence. | |
228 | |
229 While most records (for a given record code) have the same length, it is not | |
230 true of all record codes. Some record codes can have arbitrary length. In | |
231 particular, function type signatures, call instructions, phi nodes, switch | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
phi instructions? (instead of nodes)
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
232 instructions, and global variable initialization records all have variable | |
233 length. The expected length is predefined and part of the PNaClAsm language. See | |
234 the corresponding construct (associated with the record) to determine the | |
235 expected length. | |
236 | |
237 The ``PNaCl bitstream writer``, which converts records to bit sequences, does | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:43
The `` `` formatting doesn't look right in the htm
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
238 this by writing out the abbreviation index used to encode the record, followed | |
239 by the contents of the record. The details of this are left to the section on | |
240 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>`. However, at the record | |
241 level, one important aspect of this appears in ::ref:`block | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
::ref: ==> :ref:
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
242 enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` records. These records must define | |
243 how many bits are required to hold abbreviation indices associated with records | |
244 of that block. | |
245 | |
246 .. _link_for_default_abbreviations: | |
247 | |
248 Default Abbreviations | |
249 ===================== | |
250 | |
251 There are 4 predefined (default) abbreviation indices, used as the default | |
252 abbreviations for PNaCl records. They are: | |
253 | |
254 0 | |
255 Abbreviation index for the abbreviation used to bit-encode an exit block | |
256 record. | |
257 | |
258 1 | |
259 Abbreviation index for the abbreviation used to bit-encode an enter block | |
260 record. | |
261 | |
262 2 | |
263 Abbreviation index for the abbreviation used to bit-encode a user-defined | |
264 abbreviation. Note: User defined abbreviations are also encoded as records, | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"User defined" ==> "User-defined"
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
265 and hence need an abbreviation index to bit-encode them. | |
266 | |
267 3 | |
268 Abbreviation index for the default abbreviation to bit-encode all other | |
269 records in the bitcode file. | |
270 | |
271 A block may, in addition, define a list of block specific, user-defined, | |
272 abbreviations (of length ``U``). The number of bits ``B`` specified for an enter | |
273 record must be sufficiently large such that:: | |
274 | |
275 2**B >= U + 4 | |
276 | |
277 In addition, the upper limit for ``B`` is ``16``. | |
278 | |
279 PNaClAsm requires specifying the number of bits needed to read abbreviations as | |
280 part of the enter block record. This allows the PNaCl bitcode reader/writer to | |
281 use the specified number of bits to encode abbreviation indices. | |
282 | |
283 PNaCl Identifiers | |
284 ================= | |
285 | |
286 A program is defined by a :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>`. Blocks can | |
287 be nested within other blocks, including the module block. Each block defines a | |
288 sequence of records. | |
289 | |
290 Most of the records, within a block, also define unique values. Each unique | |
291 value is given a corresponding unique identifier (i.e. *ID*). In PNaClAsm, each | |
292 kind of block defines its own kind of identifiers. The names of these | |
293 identifiers are defined by concatenating a prefix character (``'@'`` or | |
294 ``'%'``), the kind of block (a single character), and a suffix index. The suffix | |
295 index is defined by the positional location of the defined value within the | |
296 records of the corresponding block. The indices are all zero based, meaning that | |
297 the first defined value (within a block) is defined using index 0. | |
298 | |
299 Identifiers are categorized into two types, *local* and *global*. Local | |
300 identifiers are identifiers that are associated with the implementation of a | |
301 single function. In that sense, they are local to the block they appear in. | |
302 | |
303 All other identifiers are global, and can appear in multiple blocks. This split | |
304 is intentional. Global identifiers are used by multiple functions, and therefore | |
305 must be known in all function implementations. Local identifiers only apply to a | |
306 single function, and can be reused between functions. The :ref:`PNaCl | |
307 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` uses this separation to parallelize the | |
308 compilation of functions. | |
309 | |
310 Note that local abbreviation identifiers are unique to the block they appear | |
311 in. Global abbreviation identifiers are only unique to the block type they are | |
312 defined for. Different block types can reuse global abbreviation identifiers. | |
313 | |
314 Global identifiers use the prefix character ``'@'`` while local identifiers use | |
315 the prefix character ``'%'``. | |
316 | |
317 Note that by using positional location to define identifiers (within a block), | |
318 the values defined in PNaCl bitcode files need not be explicitly included in the | |
319 bitcode file. Rather, they are inferred by the (ordered) position of the record | |
320 in the block. This is also intentional. It is used to reduce the amount of data | |
321 that must be (explicitly) passed to the :ref:`PNaCl | |
322 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>`, and downloaded from the cloud. | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"the cloud"? yuck...
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
How about simply "when downloaded into Chrome".
| |
323 | |
324 In general, most of the records within blocks are assumed to be topologically | |
325 sorted, putting value definitions before their uses. This implies that records | |
326 do not need to encode data if they can deduce the corresponding information from | |
327 their uses. | |
328 | |
329 The most common use of this is that many instructions use the type of their | |
330 operands to determine the type of the instruction. Again, this is | |
331 intentional. It allows less information to be stored. | |
332 | |
333 However, for function blocks (which define instructions), a topological sort may | |
334 not exist. Loop carried value dependencies simply do not allow topologically | |
335 sorting. To deal with this, function blocks have a notion of (instruction value) | |
336 :ref:`forward type | |
337 declarations<link_for_forward_type_declaration_section>`. These declarations | |
338 must appear before any of the uses of that value, if the (instruction) value is | |
339 defined later in the function than its first use. | |
340 | |
341 The kinds of identifiers used in PNaClAsm are: | |
342 | |
343 @a | |
344 Global abbreviation identifier. | |
345 | |
346 %a | |
347 Local abbreviation identifier. | |
348 | |
349 %b | |
350 Function basic block identifier. | |
351 | |
352 %c | |
353 Function constant identifier. | |
354 | |
355 @f | |
356 Global function address identifier. | |
357 | |
358 @g | |
359 Global variable/constant address identifier. | |
360 | |
361 %p | |
362 Function parameter identifier. | |
363 | |
364 @t | |
365 Global type identifier. | |
366 | |
367 %v | |
368 Value generated by an instruction in a function block. | |
369 | |
370 | |
371 Conventions For Describing Records | |
372 ================================== | |
373 | |
374 PNaClAsm is the textual representation of :ref:`PNaCl | |
375 records<link_for_pnacl_records>`. Each PNaCl record is described by a | |
376 corresponding PNaClAsm construct. These constructs are described using syntax | |
377 rules, and semantics on how they are converted to records. Along with the rules, | |
378 is a notion of :ref:`global state<link_for_global_state_section>`. The global | |
379 state is updated by syntax rules. The purpose of the global state is to track | |
380 positional dependencies between records. | |
381 | |
382 For each PNaCl construct, we define multiple subsections. The **Syntax** | |
383 subsection defines a syntax rule for the construct. The **Record** subsection | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
I think most instances of "subsection" can be chan
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
384 defines the corresponding record associated with the syntax rule. The | |
385 **Semantics** subsection describes the semantics associated with the record, in | |
386 terms of data within the global state and the corresponding syntax. It also | |
387 includes other high-level semantics, when appropriate. | |
388 | |
389 The **Constraints** subsection (if present) defines any constraints associated | |
390 with the construct, including the global state. The **Updates** subsection (if | |
391 present) defines how the global state is updated when the construct is | |
392 processed. The **Examples** subsection gives one or more examples of using the | |
393 corresponding PNaClAsm construct. | |
394 | |
395 Some semantics subsections use functions to compute values. The meaning of | |
396 functions can be found in :ref:`support | |
397 functions<link_for_support_functions_section>`. | |
398 | |
399 The syntax rule may include the | |
400 :ref:`abbreviation<link_for_abbreviations_section>` to use, when converting to a | |
401 bit-sequence. These abbreviations, if allowed, are at the end of the construct, | |
402 and enclosed in ``<`` and ``>`` brackets. These abbreviations are optional in | |
403 the syntax, and can be omitted. If they are used, the abbreviation brackets are | |
404 part of the actual syntax of the construct. If the abbreviation is omitted, the | |
405 default abbreviation index is used. To make it clear that abbreviations are | |
406 optional, syntax rules separate abbreviations using plenty of whitespace. | |
407 | |
408 Within a syntax rule, lowercase characters are literal values. Sequences of | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
"lower case" for consistency with other uses, incl
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
409 upper case alphanumeric characters are named values. If we mix lower and upper | |
410 case letters within a name appearing in a syntax rule, the lower case letters | |
411 are literal while the upper case sequence of alphanumeric characters denote rule | |
412 specific values. The valid values for each of these names will be defined in | |
413 the corresponding semantics and constraints subsections. | |
414 | |
415 For example, consider the following syntax rule:: | |
416 | |
417 %vN = add T O1, O2; <A> | |
418 | |
419 This rule defines a PNaClAsm add instruction. This construct defines an | |
420 instruction that adds two values (``O1`` and ``O2``) to generate instruction | |
421 value ``%vN``. The types of the arguments, and the result, are all of type | |
422 ``T``. If abbreviation ID ``A`` is present, the record is encoded using that | |
423 abbreviation. Otherwise the corresponding default abbreviation (3) is used. | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Can you briefly where the "3" comes from? E.g.
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Replaces with reference to "default abbreviation i
| |
424 | |
425 To be concrete, the syntactic rule above defines the structure of the following | |
426 PNaClAsm examples:: | |
427 | |
428 %v10 = add i32 %v1, %v2; <@a5> | |
429 %v11 = add i32 %v10, %v3; | |
430 | |
431 In addition to specifying the syntax, each syntax rule can also also specify the | |
432 contents of the corresponding record in the corresponding record subsection. In | |
433 simple cases, the elements of the corresponding record are predefined (literal) | |
434 constants. Otherwise the record element is an identifier from another subsection | |
435 associated with the construct. | |
436 | |
437 Factorial Example | |
438 ================= | |
439 | |
440 This section provides a simple example of a PNaCl bitcode file. Its contents | |
441 describe a bitcode file that only defines a function to compute the factorial | |
442 value of a number. | |
443 | |
444 In C, the factorial function can be defined as:: | |
445 | |
446 int fact(int n) { | |
447 if (n == 1) return 1; | |
448 return n * fact(n-1); | |
449 } | |
450 | |
451 Compiling this into a PNaCl bitcode file, and dumping out its contents with | |
452 utility :ref:`pnacl-bcdis<pnacl-bcdis>`, the corresponding output is:: | |
453 | |
454 0:0|<65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0,|Magic Number: 'PEXE' (80, 69, 88, 69) | |
455 | 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, |PNaCl Version: 2 | |
456 | 0> | | |
457 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
458 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
459 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
460 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
461 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
462 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
463 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
464 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
465 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0> | @t2 = i32 (i32); | |
466 59:4| 3: <7, 1> | @t3 = i1; | |
467 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
468 64:0| 3: <8, 2, 0, 0, 0> | define external i32 @f0(i32); | |
469 68:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
470 76:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
471 78:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
472 80:0| 1: <65535, 14, 2> | valuesymtab { // BlockID = 14 | |
473 88:0| 3: <1, 0, 102, 97, 99, | @f0 : "fact"; | |
474 | 116> | | |
475 96:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
476 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
477 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
478 108:0| 3: <1, 3> | blocks 3; | |
479 110:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
480 120:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
481 122:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
482 125:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
483 | | %b0: | |
484 128:0| 3: <28, 2, 1, 32> | %v0 = icmp eq i32 %p0, %c0; | |
485 132:6| 3: <11, 1, 2, 1> | br i1 %v0, label %b1, label %b2; | |
486 | | %b1: | |
487 136:6| 3: <10, 2> | ret i32 %c0; | |
488 | | %b2: | |
489 139:2| 3: <2, 3, 2, 1> | %v1 = sub i32 %p0, %c0; | |
490 143:2| 3: <34, 0, 5, 1> | %v2 = call i32 @f0(i32 %v1); | |
491 148:0| 3: <2, 5, 1, 2> | %v3 = mul i32 %p0, %v2; | |
492 152:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v3; | |
493 154:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
494 156:0|0: <65534> |} | |
495 | |
496 Note that there are three columns in this output. The first column contains the | |
497 bit positions of the records within the bitcode file. The second column contains | |
498 the sequence of records within the bitcode file. The third column contains the | |
499 corresponding PNaClAsm program. | |
500 | |
501 Bit positions are defined by a pair ``B:N``. ``B`` is the number of bytes, while | |
502 ``N`` is the bit offset within the ``B``-th byte. Hence, the bit position (in | |
503 bits) is:: | |
504 | |
505 B*8 + N | |
506 | |
507 Hence, the first record is at bit offset ``0`` (``0*8+0``). The second record is | |
508 at bit offset ``128`` (``16*8+0``). The third record is at bit offset ``192`` | |
509 (``24*8+0``). The fourth record is at bit offset ``212`` (``26*8+4``). | |
510 | |
511 The :ref:`header record<link_for_header_record_section>` is a sequence of 16 | |
512 bytes, defining the contents of the first 16 bytes of the bitcode file. These | |
513 bytes never change, and are expected for all version 2, PNaCl bitcode files. The | |
514 first four bytes define the magic number of the file, i.e. 'PEXE'. All PEXE | |
515 bitcode files begin with these four bytes. | |
516 | |
517 All but the header record has an abbreviation index associated with it. Since no | |
518 user-defined abbreviations are provided, all records were converted to | |
519 bit sequences using default abbreviations. | |
520 | |
521 The types block (starting at bit address ``40:0``), defines 4 types: ``i1``, | |
522 ``i32``, ``void``, and function signature ``i32 (i32)``. | |
523 | |
524 Bit address ``64:0`` declares the factorial function address ``@f0``, and its | |
525 corresponding type signature. Bit address ``88:0`` associates the name ``fact`` | |
526 with function address ``@f0``. | |
527 | |
528 Bit address ``100:0`` defines the function block that implements function | |
529 ``fact``. The entry point is ``%b0`` (at bit address ``128:0``). It uses the | |
530 32-bit integer constant ``1`` (defined at bit addresses ``122:4``). Bit address | |
531 ``128:0`` defines an equality comparison of the argument ``%p0`` with ``1`` | |
532 (constant ``%c0``). Bit address ``132:6`` defines a conditional branch. If the | |
533 result of the previous comparison (``%v0``) is true, the program will branch to | |
534 block ``%b1``. Otherwise it will branch to block ``%b2``. | |
535 | |
536 Bit address ``136:6`` returns constant ``1`` (``%c0``) when the input parameter | |
537 is 1. Instructions between bit address ``139:2`` and ``154:4`` compute and | |
538 return ``n * fact(n-1)``. | |
539 | |
540 Road Map | |
541 ======== | |
542 | |
543 At this point, this document transitions from basic concepts to the details | |
544 of how records should be formatted. This section defines the road map to | |
545 the remaining sections in this document. | |
546 | |
547 Many records have implicit information associated with them, and must be | |
548 maintained across records. :ref:`Global state<link_for_global_state_section>` | |
549 describes how this implicit information is modeled. In addition, there are | |
550 various :ref:`support functions<link_for_support_functions_section>` that are | |
551 used to define the semantics of records, and how they update the global state. | |
552 | |
553 There are just a handful of global records (records that either don't appear in | |
554 any block, or can appear in all blocks). :ref:`Global | |
555 records<link_for_global_record_codes>` describes these records. This includes | |
556 the block delimiter records :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` | |
557 and :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` that define block | |
558 boundaries. | |
559 | |
560 PNaClAsm is a strongly typed language, and most block values are typed. | |
561 :ref:`types<link_for_types_block_section>` describes the set of legal types, and | |
562 how to define types. | |
563 | |
564 Global variables and their initializers are presented in the :ref:`globals | |
565 block<link_for_globals_block_section>`. :ref:`Function | |
566 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>` are part of the :ref:`module | |
567 block<link_for_module_block>`, but must be defined before any global variables. | |
568 | |
569 Names to be associated with global variables and function addresses, are defined | |
570 in the :ref:`valuesymtab block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and must | |
571 appear after the :ref:`globals block<link_for_globals_block_section>`, but | |
572 before any :ref:`function definition<link_for_function_blocks_section>`. | |
573 | |
574 The :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>` is the top-most block, and all | |
575 other blocks must appear within the module block. The module block defines the | |
576 executable in the bitcode file. | |
577 | |
578 Constants used within a :ref:`function | |
579 definition<link_for_function_blocks_section>` must be defined using a | |
580 :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`. Each function | |
581 definition is defined by a :ref:`function | |
582 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` and constant blocks can only appear | |
583 within function blocks. Constants defined within a constant block can only be | |
584 used in the enclosing function block. | |
585 | |
586 Function definitions are defined by a sequence of instructions. There are | |
587 several types of instructions. | |
588 | |
589 A :ref:`terminator instruction<link_for_terminator_instruction_section>` is the | |
590 last instruction in a :ref:`basic block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, and | |
591 is a branch/return instruction. | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
What about unreachable? That's kind of distinct f
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
592 | |
593 There are :ref:`integer<link_for_integer_binary_instructions>` and | |
594 :ref:`floating point<link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions>` binary | |
595 operations. Integer binary instructions include both arithmetic and logical | |
596 operations. Floating point instructions define arithmetic operations. | |
597 | |
598 There are also :ref:`memory | |
599 access<link_for_memory_creation_and_access_instructions>` instructions that | |
600 allow one to load and store values. That section also includes how to define | |
601 local variables using the :ref:`alloca | |
602 instruction<link_for_alloca_instruction>`. | |
603 | |
604 One can also convert integer and floating point values using :ref:`conversion | |
605 instructions<link_for_conversion_instructions>`. | |
606 | |
607 :ref:`Comparison instructions<link_for_compare_instructions>` | |
608 allow you to compare values. | |
609 | |
610 :ref:`Vector instructions<link_for_vector_instructions>` allow you to build and | |
611 update vectors. Corresponding :ref:`intrinsic | |
612 functions<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>`, as well as | |
613 :ref:`integer<link_for_integer_binary_instructions>` and :ref:`floating | |
614 point<link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions>` binary instructions allow | |
615 you to apply operations to vectors. | |
616 | |
617 In addition, :ref:`other instructions<link_for_other_pnaclasm_instructions>` are | |
618 available. This includes function and procedure calls. | |
619 | |
620 There are also :ref:`memory | |
621 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` issues that should be | |
622 considered for global and local variables, as well as load and store | |
623 instructions. | |
624 | |
625 Finally, how to pack records is described in the | |
626 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` section. | |
627 | |
628 .. _link_for_global_state_section: | |
629 | |
630 Global State | |
631 ============ | |
632 | |
633 This section describes the global state associated with PNaClAsm. It is used to | |
634 define contextual data that is carried between records. | |
635 | |
636 In particular, PNaClAsm is a strongly typed language, and hence, we must track | |
637 the type associated with values. Subsection :ref:`link_to_typing_functions` | |
638 describes the functions used to maintain typing information associated with | |
639 values. | |
640 | |
641 Values are implicitly ordered within a block, and the indices associated with | |
642 the values do not appear in records. Rather, ID counters are used to figure out | |
643 what corresponding ID name is associated with a value generating record. | |
644 Subsection :ref:`link_to_ID_Counters` defines counters maintained in the global | |
645 state. | |
646 | |
647 In several blocks, one of the first records in the block defines how many values | |
648 are defined in in the block. The main purpose of these counts is to communicate | |
649 to the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` space requirements, or | |
650 a limit so that it can detect bad references to values. Subsection | |
651 :ref:`link_for_Size_Variables` defines variables that hold size definitions in | |
652 the corresponding records. | |
653 | |
654 Finally, the function and constants block contain implicit context between | |
655 records in those blocks. Subsection :ref:`link_to_Other_Variables` defines the | |
656 variables that contain this implicit context. | |
657 | |
658 .. _link_to_typing_functions: | |
659 | |
660 Typing Functions | |
661 ---------------- | |
662 | |
663 Associated with most identifiers is a type. This type defines what type the | |
664 corresponding value has. It is defined by the (initially empty) map:: | |
665 | |
666 TypeOf: ID -> Type | |
667 | |
668 For each type in the :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>`, a | |
669 corresponding inverse map:: | |
670 | |
671 TypeID: Type -> ID | |
672 | |
673 is maintained to convert syntactic types to the corresponding type ID. | |
674 | |
675 Note: This document assumes that map ``TypeID`` is automatically maintained | |
676 during updates to map ``TypeOf`` (when given a type ``ID``). Hence, *Updates* | |
677 subsections will not contain assignments to this map. | |
678 | |
679 Associated with each function identifier is its :ref:`type | |
680 signature<link_for_function_type>`. This is different than the type of the | |
681 function identifier, since function identifiers represent the function address | |
682 which is a pointer (and pointers are always implemented as a 32-bit integer | |
683 following the ILP32 data model). | |
684 | |
685 Function type signatures are maintained using:: | |
686 | |
687 TypeOfFcn: ID -> Type | |
688 | |
689 In addition, if a function address has an implementing block, there is a | |
690 corresponding implementation associated with the function address. To indicate | |
691 which function addresses have implementations, we use the set:: | |
692 | |
693 DefiningFcnIDs: set(ID) | |
694 | |
695 .. _link_to_ID_Counters: | |
696 | |
697 ID Counters | |
698 ----------- | |
699 | |
700 Each block defines one or more kinds of values. Value indices are generated | |
701 sequentially, starting at zero. To capture this, the following counters are | |
702 defined: | |
703 | |
704 NumTypes | |
705 The number of types defined so far (in the :ref:`types | |
706 block<link_for_types_block_section>`). | |
707 | |
708 NumFuncAddresses | |
709 The number of function addresses defined so far (in the :ref:`module | |
710 block<link_for_module_block>`). | |
711 | |
712 NumGlobalAddresses | |
713 The number of global variable/constant addresses defined so far (in the | |
714 :ref:`globals block<link_for_globals_block_section>`). | |
715 | |
716 NumParams | |
717 The number of parameters defined for a function. Note: Unlike other counters, | |
718 this value is set once, at the beginning of the corresponding :ref:`function | |
719 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, based on the type signature | |
720 associated with the function. | |
721 | |
722 NumFcnConsts | |
723 The number of constants defined in a function so far (in the corresponding | |
724 nested :ref:`constants block<link_for_constants_block_section>`). | |
725 | |
726 NumBasicBlocks | |
727 The number of basic blocks defined so far (within a :ref:`function | |
728 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`). | |
729 | |
730 NumValuedInsts | |
731 The number of instructions, generating values, defined so far (within a | |
732 :ref:`function block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`). | |
733 | |
734 .. _link_for_Size_Variables: | |
735 | |
736 Size Variables | |
737 -------------- | |
738 | |
739 A number of blocks define expected sizes of constructs. These sizes are recorded | |
740 in the following size variables: | |
741 | |
742 ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
743 The expected :ref:`number of basic blocks<link_for_basic_blocks_count>` within | |
744 a function implementation. | |
745 | |
746 ExpectedTypes | |
747 The expected :ref:`number of types<link_for_types_count_record>` defined in | |
748 the types block. | |
749 | |
750 ExpectedGlobals | |
751 The expected :ref:`number of global variable/constant | |
752 addresses<link_for_globals_count_record>` in the globals block. | |
753 | |
754 ExpectedInitializers | |
755 The expected :ref:`number of initializers<link_for_compound_initializer>` for | |
756 a global variable/constant address in the globals block. | |
757 | |
758 It is assumed that the corresponding :ref:`ID counters<link_to_ID_counters>` are | |
759 always smaller than the corresponding size variables (except | |
760 ExpectedInitializers). That is: | |
761 | |
762 NumBasicBlocks < ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Maybe this paragraph should have some special form
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Oops, I forgot the "::" after "That is". Fixing.
| |
763 NumTypes < ExpectedTypes | |
764 NumGlobalAddresses < ExpectedGlobals | |
765 | |
766 .. _link_to_Other_Variables: | |
767 | |
768 Other Variables | |
769 --------------- | |
770 | |
771 EnclosingFcnID | |
772 The function ID of the function block being processed. | |
773 | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Remove this blank line for consistency
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Actually, the consistent form is to leave a blank
| |
774 ConstantsSetType | |
775 | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Remove this blank line
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
776 Holds the type associated with the last :ref:`set type | |
777 record<link_for_constants_set_type_record>` in the constants block. Note: at | |
778 the beginning of each constants block, this variable is set to type void. | |
779 | |
780 .. _link_for_global_record_codes: | |
781 | |
782 Global Records | |
783 ============== | |
784 | |
785 Global records are records that can appear in any block. These records have | |
786 the same meaning in multiple kinds of blocks. | |
787 | |
788 There are four global PNaCl records, each having its own record code. These | |
789 global records are: | |
790 | |
791 Header | |
792 The :ref:`header record<link_for_header_record_section>` is the first record | |
793 of a PNaCl bitcode file, and identifies the file's magic number, as well as | |
794 the bitcode version it uses. The record defines the sequence of bytes that | |
795 make up the header and uniquely identifies the file as a PNaCl bitcode file. | |
796 | |
797 Enter | |
798 An :ref:`enter record<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` defines the | |
799 beginning of a block. Since blocks can be nested, one can appear inside other | |
800 blocks, as well as at the top level. | |
801 | |
802 Exit | |
803 An :ref:`exit record<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` defines the end of a | |
804 block. Hence, it must appear in every block, to end the block. | |
805 | |
806 Abbreviation | |
807 An :ref:`abbreviation record<link_for_abbreviation_record>` defines a | |
808 user-defined abbreviation to be applied to records within blocks. | |
809 Abbreviation records appearing in the abbreviations block define global | |
810 abbreviations. All other abbreviations are local to the block they appear in, | |
811 and can only be used in that block. | |
812 | |
813 All global records can't have user-defined abbreviations associated with | |
814 them. The :ref:`default abbreviation<link_for_default_abbreviations>` is always | |
815 used. | |
816 | |
817 .. _link_for_header_record_section: | |
818 | |
819 Header Record | |
820 ------------- | |
821 | |
822 The header record must be the first record in the file. It is the only record in | |
823 the bitcode file that doesn't have a corresponding construct in PNaClAsm. In | |
824 addition, no abbreviation index is associated with it. | |
825 | |
826 **Syntax**: | |
827 | |
828 There is no syntax for header records in PNaClAsm. | |
829 | |
830 **Record**:: | |
831 | |
832 <65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0, 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, 0> | |
833 | |
834 **Semantics**: | |
835 | |
836 The header record defines the initial sequence of bytes that must appear at the | |
837 beginning of all (PNaCl bitcode version 2) files. That sequence is the list of | |
838 bytes inside the record (excluding the record code). As such, it uniquely | |
839 identifies all PNaCl bitcode files. | |
840 | |
841 **Examples**:: | |
842 | |
843 0:0|<65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0,|Magic Number: 'PEXE' (80, 69, 88, 69) | |
844 | 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, |PNaCl Version: 2 | |
845 | 0> | | |
846 | |
847 .. _link_for_enter_block_record_section: | |
848 | |
849 Enter Block Record | |
850 ------------------ | |
851 | |
852 Block records can be top-level, as well as nested in other blocks. Blocks must | |
853 begin with an *enter* record, and end with an | |
854 :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` record. | |
855 | |
856 **Syntax**:: | |
857 | |
858 N { <B> | |
859 | |
860 **Record**:: | |
861 | |
862 1: <65535, ID, B> | |
863 | |
864 **Semantics**: | |
865 | |
866 Enter block records define the beginning of a block. ``B``, if present, is the | |
867 number of bits needed to represent all possible abbreviation indices used within | |
868 the block. If omitted, ``B=2`` is assumed. | |
869 | |
870 The block ``ID`` value is dependent on the name ``N``. Valid names and correspon ding | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:56
Find all 80-char violations:
grep -n '^.\{81\}'
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
871 ``BlockID`` values are defined as follows: | |
872 | |
873 ============= ======== | |
874 N Block ID | |
875 ============= ======== | |
876 abbreviations 0 | |
877 constants 11 | |
878 function 12 | |
879 globals 19 | |
880 module 8 | |
881 types 17 | |
882 valuesymtab 14 | |
883 ============= ======== | |
884 | |
885 Note: For readability, PNaClAsm defines a more readable form of a function block | |
886 enter record. See :ref:`function blocks<link_for_function_blocks_section>` for | |
887 more details. | |
888 | |
889 **Examples**:: | |
890 | |
891 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
892 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
893 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
894 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
895 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
896 48:0| 3: <1, 2> | count 2; | |
897 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
898 52:2| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t1 = void (); | |
899 55:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
900 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
901 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
902 68:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
903 70:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
904 72:0|0: <65534> |} | |
905 | |
906 .. _link_for_exit_block_record_section: | |
907 | |
908 Exit Block Record | |
909 ----------------- | |
910 | |
911 Block records can be top-level, as well as nested, records. Blocks must begin | |
912 with an :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` record, and end with a n | |
913 *exit* record. | |
914 | |
915 **Syntax**:: | |
916 | |
917 } | |
918 | |
919 **Record**:: | |
920 | |
921 0: <65534> | |
922 | |
923 **Semantics**: | |
924 | |
925 All exit records are identical, no matter what block they are ending. An exit | |
926 record defines the end of the block. | |
927 | |
928 **Examples**:: | |
929 | |
930 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
931 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
932 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
933 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
934 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
935 48:0| 3: <1, 2> | count 2; | |
936 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
937 52:2| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t1 = void (); | |
938 55:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
939 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
940 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
941 68:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
942 70:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
943 72:0|0: <65534> |} | |
944 | |
945 .. _link_for_abbreviation_record: | |
946 | |
947 Abbreviation Record | |
948 ------------------- | |
949 | |
950 Abbreviation records define abbreviations. See | |
951 :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` for details on how abbrevia tions should be | |
952 written. This section only presents the mechanical details for converting | |
953 an abbreviation into a PNaCl record. | |
954 | |
955 **Syntax**:: | |
956 | |
957 A = abbrev <E1, ... , EM>; | |
958 | |
959 **Record**:: | |
960 | |
961 2: <65533, M, EE1, ... , EEM> | |
962 | |
963 **Semantics**: | |
964 | |
965 Defines an abbreviation ``A`` as the sequence of encodings ``E1`` through | |
966 ``EM``. If the abbreviation appears within the :ref:`abbreviations | |
967 block<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>`, ``A`` must be a global | |
968 abbreviation. Otherwise, ``A`` must be a local abbreviation. | |
969 | |
970 Abbreviations within a block (or a section within the abbreviations block), must | |
971 be enumerated in order, starting at index ``0``. | |
972 | |
973 Valid encodings ``Ei``, and the corresponding sequence of (unsigned) integers | |
974 ``EEi``, ( for ``1 <= i <= M``) are defined by the following table: | |
975 | |
976 ========= ======= ============================================================== = | |
977 Ei EEi Form | |
978 ========= ======= ============================================================== = | |
979 C 1, C Literal C in corresponding position in record. | |
980 fixed(N) 0, 1, N Encode value as a fixed sequence of N bits. | |
981 vbr(N) 0, 2, N Encode value using a variable bit rate of N. | |
982 char6 0, 4 Encode value as 6-bit char containing characters [a-zA-Z0-9._] . | |
983 array(EM) 0, 3 Allow zero or more of the enclosed encoding. | |
984 ========= ======= ============================================================== = | |
985 | |
986 Notationally, Array(EM) encloses the encoding EM, and must appear at the end of | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Should Array(EM) be formatted consistently with ``
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
987 the abbreviation. When encoding ``array(EM), array and EM`` are the last two | |
988 entries in an abbreviation, the trailing EM is omitted from the syntax, since it | |
989 is redundant. | |
990 | |
991 **Examples**:: | |
992 | |
993 0:0|<65532, 80, 69, 88, 69, 1, 0,|Magic Number: 'PEXE' (80, 69, 88, 69) | |
994 | 8, 0, 17, 0, 4, 0, 2, 0, 0, |PNaCl Version: 2 | |
995 | 0> | | |
996 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
997 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
998 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
999 36:0| 1: <1, 14> | valuesymtab: | |
1000 38:4| 2: <65533, 4, 0, 1, 3, 0,| @a0 = abbrev <fixed(3), vbr(8), | |
1001 | 2, 8, 0, 3, 0, 1, 8> | array(fixed(8))>; | |
1002 43:2| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 1, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <1, vbr(8), | |
1003 | 8, 0, 3, 0, 1, 7> | array(fixed(7))>; | |
1004 48:0| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 1, 0, 2,| @a2 = abbrev <1, vbr(8), | |
1005 | 8, 0, 3, 0, 4> | array(char6)>; | |
1006 52:1| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 2, 0, 2,| @a3 = abbrev <2, vbr(8), | |
1007 | 8, 0, 3, 0, 4> | array(char6)>; | |
1008 56:2| 1: <1, 11> | constants: | |
1009 58:6| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 1, 0, 1,| @a0 = abbrev <1, fixed(2)>; | |
1010 | 2> | | |
1011 61:7| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 4, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <4, vbr(8)>; | |
1012 | 8> | | |
1013 65:0| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 4, 1, 0>| @a2 = abbrev <4, 0>; | |
1014 68:1| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 6, 0, 2,| @a3 = abbrev <6, vbr(8)>; | |
1015 | 8> | | |
1016 71:2| 1: <1, 12> | function: | |
1017 73:6| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 20, 0, | @a0 = abbrev <20, vbr(6), vbr(4), | |
1018 | 2, 6, 0, 2, 4, 0, 2, | vbr(4)>; | |
1019 | 4> | | |
1020 79:1| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 2, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <2, vbr(6), vbr(6), | |
1021 | 6, 0, 2, 6, 0, 1, 4> | fixed(4)>; | |
1022 84:4| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 3, 0, 2,| @a2 = abbrev <3, vbr(6), | |
1023 | 6, 0, 1, 2, 0, 1, 4> | fixed(2), fixed(4)>; | |
1024 89:7| 2: <65533, 1, 1, 10> | @a3 = abbrev <10>; | |
1025 91:7| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 10, 0, | @a4 = abbrev <10, vbr(6)>; | |
1026 | 2, 6> | | |
1027 95:0| 2: <65533, 1, 1, 15> | @a5 = abbrev <15>; | |
1028 97:0| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 43, 0, | @a6 = abbrev <43, vbr(6), | |
1029 | 2, 6, 0, 1, 2> | fixed(2)>; | |
1030 101:2| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 24, 0, | @a7 = abbrev <24, vbr(6), vbr(6), | |
1031 | 2, 6, 0, 2, 6, 0, 2, | vbr(4)>; | |
1032 | 4> | | |
1033 106:5| 1: <1, 19> | globals: | |
1034 109:1| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 0, 0, 2,| @a0 = abbrev <0, vbr(6), | |
1035 | 6, 0, 1, 1> | fixed(1)>; | |
1036 113:3| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 1, 0, 2,| @a1 = abbrev <1, vbr(8)>; | |
1037 | 8> | | |
1038 116:4| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 2, 0, 2,| @a2 = abbrev <2, vbr(8)>; | |
1039 | 8> | | |
1040 119:5| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 3, 0, 3,| @a3 = abbrev <3, array(fixed(8))> | |
1041 | 0, 1, 8> | ; | |
1042 123:2| 2: <65533, 2, 1, 4, 0, 2,| @a4 = abbrev <4, vbr(6)>; | |
1043 | 6> | | |
1044 126:3| 2: <65533, 3, 1, 4, 0, 2,| @a5 = abbrev <4, vbr(6), vbr(6)>; | |
1045 | 6, 0, 2, 6> | | |
1046 130:5| 0: <65534> | } | |
1047 132:0| 1: <65535, 17, 3> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1048 140:0| 2: <65533, 4, 1, 21, 0, | %a0 = abbrev <21, fixed(1), | |
1049 | 1, 1, 0, 3, 0, 1, 2> | array(fixed(2))>; | |
1050 144:7| 3: <1, 3> | count 3; | |
1051 147:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
1052 150:7| 4: <21, 0, 0, 0, 0> | @t1 = i32 (i32, i32); <%a0> | |
1053 152:7| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
1054 154:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
1055 156:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 0, 0> | define external i32 @f0(i32, i32); | |
1056 160:6| 1: <65535, 19, 4> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1057 168:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
1058 170:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
1059 172:0| 1: <65535, 14, 3> | valuesymtab { // BlockID = 14 | |
1060 180:0| 6: <1, 0, 102> | @f0 : "f"; <@a2> | |
1061 182:7| 0: <65534> | } | |
1062 184:0| 1: <65535, 12, 4> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
1063 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
1064 192:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
1065 | | %b0: | |
1066 194:6| 5: <2, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %p0, %p1; <@a1> | |
1067 197:2| 5: <2, 3, 1, 0> | %v1 = add i32 %p0, %v0; <@a1> | |
1068 199:6| 8: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; <@a4> | |
1069 201:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
1070 204:0|0: <65534> |} | |
1071 | |
1072 Note that the example above shows the standard abbreviations used by | |
1073 *pnacl-finalize*. | |
1074 | |
1075 .. _link_for_types_block_section: | |
1076 | |
1077 Types Block | |
1078 =========== | |
1079 | |
1080 The types block defines all types used in a program. It must appear in the | |
1081 :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>`, before any :ref:`function | |
1082 address<link_for_function_address_section>` records, the :ref:`globals | |
1083 block<link_for_globals_block_section>`, the :ref:`valuesymtab | |
1084 block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and any :ref:`function | |
1085 blocks<link_for_function_blocks_section>`. | |
1086 | |
1087 All types used in a program must be defined in the types block. Many PNaClAsm | |
1088 constructs allow one to use explicit type names, rather than the type | |
1089 identifiers defined by this block. However, they are internally converted to the | |
1090 corresponding type identifier in the types block. Hence, the requirement that | |
1091 the types block must appear early in the module block. | |
1092 | |
1093 Each record in the types block defines a type used by the program. Types can be | |
1094 broken into the following groups: | |
1095 | |
1096 Primitive value types | |
1097 Defines the set of base types for values. This includes various sizes of | |
1098 integer and floating point types. | |
1099 | |
1100 Void type | |
1101 A primitive type that doesn't represent any value and has no size. | |
1102 | |
1103 Function types | |
1104 The type signatures of functions. | |
1105 | |
1106 Vector type | |
1107 Defines vectors of primitive types. | |
1108 | |
1109 In addition, any type that is not defined using another type is a primitive | |
1110 type. All other types (i.e. function and vector) are composite types. | |
1111 | |
1112 Types must be defined in a topological order, causing primitive types to appear | |
1113 before the composite types that use them. Each type must be unique. There are no | |
1114 additional restrictions on the order that types can be defined in a types block. | |
1115 | |
1116 The following subsections introduce each valid PNaClAsm type, and the | |
1117 corresponding PNaClAsm construct that defines the type. Types not defined in the | |
1118 types block, can't be used in a PNaCl program. | |
1119 | |
1120 The first record of a types block must be a :ref:`count | |
1121 record<link_for_types_count_record>`, defining how many types are defined by the | |
1122 types block. All remaining records defines a type. The following subsections | |
1123 defines valid records within a types block. The order of type records is | |
1124 important. The position of each defining record implicitly defines the type ID | |
1125 that will be used to denote that type, within other PNaCl records of the bitcode | |
1126 file. | |
1127 | |
1128 To make this more concrete, consider the following example types block:: | |
1129 | |
1130 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1131 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
1132 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
1133 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
1134 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
1135 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (i32, float); | |
1136 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
1137 | |
1138 This example defines a types block that defines four type IDs: | |
1139 | |
1140 @t0 | |
1141 A 32-bit integer type. | |
1142 @t1 | |
1143 A 32-bit floating point type. | |
1144 @t2 | |
1145 The void type. | |
1146 @t3 | |
1147 A function, taking 32-bit integer and float point arguments that returns | |
1148 void. | |
1149 | |
1150 .. _link_for_types_count_record: | |
1151 | |
1152 Count Record | |
1153 ------------ | |
1154 | |
1155 The *count record* defines how many types are defined in the types | |
1156 block. Following the types count record are records that define types used by | |
1157 the PNaCl program. | |
1158 | |
1159 **Syntax**:: | |
1160 | |
1161 count N; <A> | |
1162 | |
1163 **Record**:: | |
1164 | |
1165 AA: <1, N> | |
1166 | |
1167 **Semantics**: | |
1168 | |
1169 This construct defines the number of types used by the PNaCl program. ``N`` is | |
1170 the number of types defined in the types block. It is an error to define more | |
1171 (or fewer) types than value ``N``, within the enclosing types block. | |
1172 | |
1173 **Constraints**:: | |
1174 | |
1175 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1176 0 == NumTypes | |
1177 | |
1178 **Updates**: | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:43
::
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
1179 | |
1180 ExpectedTypes = N; | |
1181 | |
1182 **Examples**:: | |
1183 | |
1184 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1185 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
1186 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
1187 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
1188 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
1189 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (i32, float); | |
1190 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
1191 | |
1192 Void Type | |
1193 --------- | |
1194 | |
1195 The *void* type record defines the void type, which corresponds to the type that | |
1196 doesn't define any value, and has no size. | |
1197 | |
1198 **Syntax**:: | |
1199 | |
1200 @tN = void; <A> | |
1201 | |
1202 **Record**:: | |
1203 | |
1204 AA: <2> | |
1205 | |
1206 **Semantics**: | |
1207 | |
1208 The void type record defines the type that has no values and has no size. | |
1209 | |
1210 **Constraints**:: | |
1211 | |
1212 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1213 N == NumTypes | |
1214 | |
1215 **Updates**:: | |
1216 | |
1217 ++NumTypes; | |
1218 TypeOf(@tN) = void; | |
1219 | |
1220 **Examples**:: | |
1221 | |
1222 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1223 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
1224 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
1225 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
1226 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
1227 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
1228 | |
1229 Integer Types | |
1230 ------------- | |
1231 | |
1232 PNaClAsm allows integer types for various bit sizes. Valid bit sizes are 1, 8, | |
1233 16, 32, and 64. Integers can be signed or unsigned, but the signed component of | |
1234 an integer is not specified by the type. Rather, individual instructions | |
1235 determine whether the value is assumed to be signed or unsigned. | |
1236 | |
1237 It should be noted that in PNaClAsm, all pointers are implemented as 32-bit | |
1238 (unsigned) integers. There isn't a separate type for pointers. The only way to | |
1239 tell that a 32-bit integer is a pointer, is when it is used in an instruction | |
1240 that requires a pointer (such as load and store instructions). | |
1241 | |
1242 **Syntax**:: | |
1243 | |
1244 @tN = iB; <A> | |
1245 | |
1246 **Record**:: | |
1247 | |
1248 AA: <7, B> | |
1249 | |
1250 **Semantics**: | |
1251 | |
1252 An integer type record defines an integer type. ``B`` defines the number of bits | |
1253 of the integer type. | |
1254 | |
1255 **Constraints**:: | |
1256 | |
1257 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1258 N == NumTypes & | |
1259 B in {1, 8, 16, 32, 64} | |
1260 | |
1261 **Updates**:: | |
1262 | |
1263 ++NumTypes; | |
1264 TypeOf(@tN) = iB; | |
1265 | |
1266 **Examples**:: | |
1267 | |
1268 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1269 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
1270 50:4| 3: <7, 64> | @t0 = i64; | |
1271 53:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
1272 56:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t2 = i8; | |
1273 58:6| 3: <7, 16> | @t3 = i16; | |
1274 61:2| 3: <7, 32> | @t4 = i32; | |
1275 64:4| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t5 = i64 (i1); | |
1276 68:4| 3: <2> | @t6 = void; | |
1277 70:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
1278 | |
1279 32-Bit Floating Point Type | |
1280 -------------------------- | |
1281 | |
1282 PNaClAsm allows computation on 32-bit floating point values. A floating point | |
1283 type record defines the 32-bit floating point type. | |
1284 | |
1285 **Syntax**:: | |
1286 | |
1287 @tN = float; <A> | |
1288 | |
1289 **Record**:: | |
1290 | |
1291 AA: <3> | |
1292 | |
1293 **Semantics**: | |
1294 | |
1295 A floating point type record defines the 32-bit floating point type. | |
1296 | |
1297 **Constraints**:: | |
1298 | |
1299 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1300 N == NumTypes | |
1301 | |
1302 **Updates**:: | |
1303 | |
1304 ++NumTypes; | |
1305 TypeOf(@tN) = float; | |
1306 | |
1307 **Examples**:: | |
1308 | |
1309 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1310 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
1311 50:4| 3: <4> | @t0 = double; | |
1312 52:2| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
1313 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = double (float); | |
1314 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
1315 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
1316 | |
1317 64-bit Floating Point Type | |
1318 -------------------------- | |
1319 | |
1320 PNaClAsm allows computation on 64-bit floating point values. A 64-bit floating | |
1321 type record defines the 64-bit floating point type. | |
1322 | |
1323 **Syntax**:: | |
1324 | |
1325 @tN = double; <A> | |
1326 | |
1327 **Record**:: | |
1328 | |
1329 AA: <4> | |
1330 | |
1331 **Semantics**: | |
1332 | |
1333 A double type record defines the 64-bit floating point type. | |
1334 | |
1335 **Constraints**:: | |
1336 | |
1337 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1338 N == NumTypes | |
1339 | |
1340 **Updates**:: | |
1341 | |
1342 ++NumTypes; | |
1343 TypeOf(@tN) = double; | |
1344 | |
1345 **Examples**:: | |
1346 | |
1347 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1348 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
1349 50:4| 3: <4> | @t0 = double; | |
1350 52:2| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
1351 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = double (float); | |
1352 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
1353 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
1354 | |
1355 Vector Types | |
1356 ------------ | |
1357 | |
1358 A vector type is a derived type that represents a vector of elements. Vector | |
1359 types are used when multiple primitive data values are operated in parallel | |
1360 using a single (SIMD) :ref:`vector instruction<link_for_vector_instructions>`. A | |
1361 vector type requires a size (number of elements) and an underlying primitive | |
1362 data type. | |
1363 | |
1364 **Syntax**:: | |
1365 | |
1366 @tN = < E x T > <A> | |
1367 | |
1368 **Record**:: | |
1369 | |
1370 AA: <12, E, TT> | |
1371 | |
1372 **Semantics**: | |
1373 | |
1374 The vector type defines a vector of elements. ``T`` is the type of each | |
1375 element. ``E`` is the number of elements in the vector. | |
1376 | |
1377 Vector types can only be defined on ``i1``, ``i8``, ``i16``, ``i32``, and | |
1378 ``float``. All vector types, except those on ``i1``, must contain exactly 128 | |
1379 bits. The valid element sizes are restricted as follows: | |
1380 | |
1381 ====== =================== | |
1382 Type Valid element sizes | |
1383 ====== =================== | |
1384 i1 4, 8, 16 | |
1385 i8 16 | |
1386 i16 8 | |
1387 i32 4 | |
1388 float 4 | |
1389 ====== =================== | |
1390 | |
1391 **Constraints**:: | |
1392 | |
1393 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1394 TT == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(T)) & | |
1395 N == NumTypes | |
1396 | |
1397 **Updates**:: | |
1398 | |
1399 ++NumTypes | |
1400 TypeOf(@tN) = <E x T> | |
1401 | |
1402 **Examples**:: | |
1403 | |
1404 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1405 48:0| 3: <1, 14> | count 14; | |
1406 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
1407 53:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
1408 56:2| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
1409 58:0| 3: <12, 4, 1> | @t3 = <4 x i1>; | |
1410 61:2| 3: <12, 8, 1> | @t4 = <8 x i1>; | |
1411 64:4| 3: <12, 16, 1> | @t5 = <16 x i1>; | |
1412 67:6| 3: <7, 8> | @t6 = i8; | |
1413 70:2| 3: <12, 16, 6> | @t7 = <16 x i8>; | |
1414 73:4| 3: <7, 16> | @t8 = i16; | |
1415 76:0| 3: <12, 8, 8> | @t9 = <8 x i16>; | |
1416 79:2| 3: <12, 4, 0> | @t10 = <4 x i32>; | |
1417 82:4| 3: <3> | @t11 = float; | |
1418 84:2| 3: <12, 4, 11> | @t12 = <4 x float>; | |
1419 87:4| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t13 = void (); | |
1420 90:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
1421 | |
1422 .. _link_for_function_type: | |
1423 | |
1424 Function Type | |
1425 ------------- | |
1426 | |
1427 The *function* type can be thought of as a function signature. It consists of a | |
1428 return type, and a (possibly empty) list of formal parameter types. | |
1429 | |
1430 **Syntax**:: | |
1431 | |
1432 %tN = RT (T1, ... , TM) <A> | |
1433 | |
1434 **Record**:: | |
1435 | |
1436 AA: <21, 0, IRT, IT1, ... , ITM> | |
1437 | |
1438 **Semantics**: | |
1439 | |
1440 The function type defines the signature of a function. ``RT`` is the return type | |
1441 of the function, while types ``T1`` through ``TM`` are the types of the | |
1442 arguments. Indices to the corresponding type identifiers are stored in the | |
1443 corresponding record. | |
1444 | |
1445 The return value must either be a primitive type, type ``void``, or a vector | |
1446 type. Parameter types can be a primitive or vector type. | |
1447 | |
1448 For ordinary functions, the only valid integer types that can be used for a | |
1449 return or parameter type are ``i32`` and ``i64``. All other integer types are | |
1450 not allowed. | |
1451 | |
1452 For :ref:`intrinsic functions<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>`, all | |
1453 integer types are allowed for both return and parameter types. | |
1454 | |
1455 **Constraints**:: | |
1456 | |
1457 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1458 M >= 0 & | |
1459 IRT == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(RT)) & | |
1460 IT1 == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(T1)) & | |
1461 ... | |
1462 ITM == AbsoluteIndex(TypeID(TM)) & | |
1463 N == NumTypes | |
1464 | |
1465 **Updates**:: | |
1466 | |
1467 ++NumTypes | |
1468 TypeOf(@tN) = RT (T1, ... , TM) | |
1469 | |
1470 **Examples**:: | |
1471 | |
1472 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1473 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
1474 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
1475 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
1476 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
1477 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 1> | @t3 = double (float); | |
1478 61:2| 3: <2> | @t4 = void; | |
1479 63:0| 3: <21, 0, 4> | @t5 = void (); | |
1480 66:2| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 2>| @t6 = | |
1481 | | i32 (i32, float, i32, double); | |
1482 72:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1483 | |
1484 .. _link_for_globals_block_section: | |
1485 | |
1486 Globals Block | |
1487 ============= | |
1488 | |
1489 The globals block defines global addresses of variables and constants, used by | |
1490 the PNaCl program. It also defines the memory associated with the global | |
1491 addresses, and how to initialize each global variable/constant. It must appear | |
1492 in the :ref:`module block<link_for_module_block>`. It must appear after the | |
1493 :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>`, as well as after all | |
1494 :ref:`function address<link_for_function_address_section>` records. But, it must | |
1495 also appear before the :ref:`valuesymtab | |
1496 block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and any | |
1497 :ref:`function blocks<link_for_function_blocks_section>`. | |
1498 | |
1499 The globals block begins with a :ref:`count | |
1500 record<link_for_globals_count_record>`, defining how many global addresses are | |
1501 defined by the PNaCl program. It is then followed by a sequence of records that | |
1502 defines each global address, and how each global address is initialized. | |
1503 | |
1504 The standard sequence, for defining global addresses, begins with a global | |
1505 address record. It is then followed by a sequence of records defining how the | |
1506 global address is initialized. If the initializer is simple, a single record is | |
1507 used. Otherwise, the initializer is preceded with a :ref:`compound | |
1508 record<link_for_compound_initializer>`, specifying a number *N*, followed by | |
1509 sequence of *N* simple initializer records. | |
1510 | |
1511 The size of the memory referenced by each global address is defined by its | |
1512 initializer records. All simple initializer records define a sequence of | |
1513 bytes. A compound initializer defines the sequence of bytes by concatenating the | |
1514 corresponding sequence of bytes for each of its simple initializer records. | |
1515 | |
1516 For notational convenience, PNaClAsm begins a compound record with a "{", and | |
1517 inserts a "}" after the last initializer record associated with the compound | |
1518 record. This latter "}" does not correspond to any record. It is implicitly | |
1519 assumed by the size specified in the compound record, and is added only to | |
1520 improve readability. | |
1521 | |
1522 Explicit alignment is specified for global addresses, and must be a power of | |
1523 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
1524 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
1525 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
1526 | |
1527 For example, consider the following pnacl-bcdis output snippet:: | |
1528 | |
1529 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1530 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1531 62:4| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g0, align 1, | |
1532 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1533 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
1534 71:4| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
1535 74:0| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
1536 78:6| 3: <2, 2> | zerofill 2; | |
1537 | | } | |
1538 81:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
1539 | |
1540 This snippet defines the global constant ``@g0``, and the global variable | |
1541 ``@g1``. ``@g0`` is 8 bytes long, and initialized to zero. ``@g1`` is | |
1542 initialized with 6 bytes: ``1 2 3 4 0 0``. | |
1543 | |
1544 .. _link_for_globals_count_record: | |
1545 | |
1546 Count Record | |
1547 ------------ | |
1548 | |
1549 The count record defines the number of global addresses used by the PNaCl | |
1550 program. | |
1551 | |
1552 **Syntax**:: | |
1553 | |
1554 count N; <A> | |
1555 | |
1556 **Record**:: | |
1557 | |
1558 AA: <5, N> | |
1559 | |
1560 **Semantics**: | |
1561 | |
1562 This record must appear first in the globals block. The count record defines | |
1563 the number of global addresses used by the program. | |
1564 | |
1565 **Constraints**:: | |
1566 | |
1567 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
1568 | |
1569 **Updates**:: | |
1570 | |
1571 ExpectedGlobals = N; | |
1572 ExpectedInitializers = 0; | |
1573 | |
1574 **Examples**:: | |
1575 | |
1576 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1577 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1578 62:4| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g0, align 1, | |
1579 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1580 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
1581 71:4| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
1582 74:0| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
1583 78:6| 3: <2, 2> | zerofill 2; | |
1584 | | } | |
1585 81:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
1586 | |
1587 .. _link_for_global_variable_address: | |
1588 | |
1589 Global Variable Addresses | |
1590 ------------------------- | |
1591 | |
1592 A global variable address record defines a global address to global data. The | |
1593 global variable address record must be immediately followed by initializer | |
1594 record(s) that define how the corresponding global variable is initialized. | |
1595 | |
1596 **Syntax**:: | |
1597 | |
1598 var @gN, align V, <A> | |
1599 | |
1600 **Record**:: | |
1601 | |
1602 AA: <0, VV, 0> | |
1603 | |
1604 **Semantics**: | |
1605 | |
1606 A global variable address record defines a global address for a global variable. | |
1607 ``V`` is the :ref:`memory | |
1608 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for the global variable | |
1609 address, and is a power of 2. | |
1610 | |
1611 It is assumed that the memory, referenced by the global variable address, can be | |
1612 both read and written to. | |
1613 | |
1614 **Constraints**:: | |
1615 | |
1616 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1617 N == NumGlobalAddresses & | |
1618 ExpectedInitializers == 0 & | |
1619 VV == Log2(V+1) | |
1620 | |
1621 **Updates**:: | |
1622 | |
1623 ++NumGlobalAddresses; | |
1624 ExpectedInitializers = 1; | |
1625 TypeOf(@gN) = i32; | |
1626 | |
1627 **Examples**:: | |
1628 | |
1629 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1630 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1631 62:4| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g0, align 4, | |
1632 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1633 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
1634 71:4| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
1635 76:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
1636 80:0|0: <65534> |} | |
1637 | |
1638 .. _link_for_global_constant_address: | |
1639 | |
1640 Global Constant Addresses | |
1641 ------------------------- | |
1642 | |
1643 A global constant address record defines an address corresponding to a global | |
1644 constant that can't be modified by the program. The global constant address | |
1645 record must be immediately followed by initializer record(s) that define how | |
1646 the corresponding global constant is initialized. | |
1647 | |
1648 **Syntax**:: | |
1649 | |
1650 const @gN, align V, <A> | |
1651 | |
1652 **Record**:: | |
1653 | |
1654 AA: <0, VV, 1> | |
1655 | |
1656 **Semantics**: | |
1657 | |
1658 A global constant address record defines a global address for a global constant. | |
1659 ``V`` is the :ref:`memory | |
1660 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for the global constant | |
1661 address, and is a power of 2. | |
1662 | |
1663 It is assumed that the memory, referenced by the global constant address, is | |
1664 only read, and can't be written to. | |
1665 | |
1666 Note that the only difference between a global variable address and a global | |
1667 constant address record is the third element of the record. If the value is | |
1668 zero, it defines a global variable address. If the value is one, it defines a | |
1669 global constant address. | |
1670 | |
1671 **Constraints**:: | |
1672 | |
1673 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1674 N == NumGlobalAddresses & | |
1675 ExpectedInitializers == 0 & | |
1676 VV == Log2(V+1) | |
1677 | |
1678 **Updates**:: | |
1679 | |
1680 ++NumGlobalAddresses; | |
1681 ExpectedInitializers = 1; | |
1682 TypeOf(@gN) = i32; | |
1683 | |
1684 **Examples**:: | |
1685 | |
1686 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1687 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1688 62:4| 3: <0, 3, 1> | const @g0, align 4, | |
1689 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1690 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g1, align 1, | |
1691 71:4| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
1692 76:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
1693 | |
1694 Zerofill Initializer | |
1695 -------------------- | |
1696 | |
1697 The zerofill initializer record initializes a sequence of bytes, associated with | |
1698 a global address, with zeros. | |
1699 | |
1700 **Syntax**:: | |
1701 | |
1702 zerofill N; <A> | |
1703 | |
1704 **Record**:: | |
1705 | |
1706 AA: <2, N> | |
1707 | |
1708 **Semantics**: | |
1709 | |
1710 A zerofill initializer record initializes a sequence of bytes, associated with a | |
1711 global address, with zeros. The number of bytes initialized to zero is ``N``. | |
1712 | |
1713 **Constraints**:: | |
1714 | |
1715 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1716 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
1717 | |
1718 **Updates**:: | |
1719 | |
1720 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
1721 | |
1722 **Examples**:: | |
1723 | |
1724 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1725 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1726 62:4| 3: <0, 3, 1> | const @g0, align 4, | |
1727 65:6| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1728 68:2| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g1, align 1, | |
1729 71:4| 3: <2, 4> | zerofill 4; | |
1730 74:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
1731 | |
1732 Data Initializer | |
1733 ---------------- | |
1734 | |
1735 Data records define a sequence of bytes. These bytes define the initial value of | |
1736 the contents of the corresponding memory. | |
1737 | |
1738 **Syntax**:: | |
1739 | |
1740 { B1 , .... , BN } <A> | |
1741 | |
1742 **Record**:: | |
1743 | |
1744 AA: <3, B1, ..., BN> | |
1745 | |
1746 **Semantics**: | |
1747 | |
1748 A data record defines a sequence of (unsigned) bytes ``B1`` through ``BN``, that | |
1749 initialize ``N`` bytes of memory. | |
1750 | |
1751 **Constraints**:: | |
1752 | |
1753 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1754 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
1755 | |
1756 **Updates**:: | |
1757 | |
1758 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
1759 | |
1760 **Examples**:: | |
1761 | |
1762 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
1763 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1764 68:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1765 70:4| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g0, align 1, | |
1766 73:6| 3: <3, 1, 2, 97, 36, 44, | { 1, 2, 97, 36, 44, 88, | |
1767 | 88, 44, 50> | 44, 50} | |
1768 86:0| 3: <0, 1, 1> | const @g1, align 1, | |
1769 89:2| 3: <1, 3> | initializers 3 { | |
1770 91:6| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
1771 96:4| 3: <4, 0> | reloc @f0; | |
1772 99:0| 3: <3, 99, 66, 22, 12> | { 99, 66, 22, 12} | |
1773 | | } | |
1774 105:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
1775 | |
1776 Relocation Initializer | |
1777 ---------------------- | |
1778 | |
1779 A relocation initializer record allows one to define the initial value of a | |
1780 global address with the value of another global address (i.e. either | |
1781 :ref:`function<link_for_function_address_section>`, | |
1782 :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>`, or | |
1783 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>`). Since addresses are | |
1784 pointers, a relocation initializer record defines 4 bytes of memory. | |
1785 | |
1786 **Syntax**:: | |
1787 | |
1788 reloc V; <A> | |
1789 | |
1790 **Record**:: | |
1791 | |
1792 AA: <4, VV> | |
1793 | |
1794 **Semantics**: | |
1795 | |
1796 A relocation initializer record defines a 4-byte value containing the specified | |
1797 global address ``V``. | |
1798 | |
1799 **Constraints**:: | |
1800 | |
1801 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1802 VV == AbsoluteIndex(V) & | |
1803 VV >= NumFuncAddresses & | |
1804 VV < NumFuncAddresses + ExpectedGlobals & | |
1805 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
1806 | |
1807 **Updates**: | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
::
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
1808 | |
1809 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
1810 | |
1811 **Examples**:: | |
1812 | |
1813 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1814 48:0| 3: <1, 2> | count 2; | |
1815 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
1816 52:2| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t1 = void (); | |
1817 55:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1818 56:0| 3: <8, 1, 0, 1, 0> | declare external void @f0(); | |
1819 60:6| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1820 68:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1821 70:4| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g0, align 1, | |
1822 73:6| 3: <1, 3> | initializers 3 { | |
1823 76:2| 3: <4, 0> | reloc @f0; | |
1824 78:6| 3: <4, 1> | reloc @g0; | |
1825 81:2| 3: <4, 2> | reloc @g1; | |
1826 | | } | |
1827 83:6| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g1, align 4, | |
1828 87:0| 3: <2, 4> | zerofill 4; | |
1829 89:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1830 | |
1831 This example defines global address ``@g0`` and ``@g1``. ``@g0`` defines 12 | |
1832 bytes of memory, and is initialized with three addresses ``@f1``, ``@g0``, and | |
1833 ``@g1``. Note that all global addresses can be used in a relocation | |
1834 initialization record, even if it isn't defined yet. | |
1835 | |
1836 Subfield Relocation Initializer | |
1837 ------------------------------- | |
1838 | |
1839 A subfield relocation initializer record allows one to define the initial value | |
1840 of a global address with the value of another (non-function) global address | |
1841 (i.e. either :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>` or | |
1842 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>` address), plus a | |
1843 constant. Since addresses are pointers, a relocation initializer record defines | |
1844 4 bytes of memory. | |
1845 | |
1846 **Syntax**:: | |
1847 | |
1848 reloc V + X; <A> | |
1849 reloc V - X; <A> | |
1850 | |
1851 **Record**:: | |
1852 | |
1853 AA: <4, VV, XXX> | |
1854 | |
1855 **Semantics**: | |
1856 | |
1857 A subfield relocation initializer record defines a 4-byte value containing the | |
1858 specified global (non-function) address ``V``, modified by the unsigned offset | |
1859 ``X``. ``XX`` is the corresponding signed offset. In the first form, ``XX == | |
1860 X``. In the second form, ``XX == -X``. | |
1861 | |
1862 **Constraints**:: | |
1863 | |
1864 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
1865 VV == AbsoluteIndex(V) | |
1866 VV >= NumFuncAddresses | |
1867 VV < NumFuncAddresses + ExpectedGlobals | |
1868 ExpectedInitializers > 0 | |
1869 XXX == SignRotate(XX) | |
1870 | |
1871 **Updates**:: | |
1872 | |
1873 --ExpectedInitializers; | |
1874 | |
1875 **Examples**:: | |
1876 | |
1877 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1878 48:0| 3: <1, 0> | count 0; | |
1879 50:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1880 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1881 60:0| 3: <5, 3> | count 3; | |
1882 62:4| 3: <0, 1, 0> | var @g0, align 1, | |
1883 65:6| 3: <1, 3> | initializers 3 { | |
1884 68:2| 3: <4, 0, 1> | reloc @g0 + 1; | |
1885 71:4| 3: <4, 1, 4294967295> | reloc @g1 - 1; | |
1886 79:2| 3: <4, 2, 4> | reloc @g2 + 4; | |
1887 | | } | |
1888 82:4| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g1, align 4, | |
1889 85:6| 3: <2, 4> | zerofill 4; | |
1890 88:2| 3: <0, 3, 0> | var @g2, align 4, | |
1891 91:4| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1892 94:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
1893 | |
1894 .. _link_for_compound_initializer: | |
1895 | |
1896 Compound Initializer | |
1897 -------------------- | |
1898 | |
1899 The compound initializer record must immediately follow a global | |
1900 :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>` or | |
1901 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>` address record. It defines how | |
1902 many simple initializer records are used to define the initializer. The size of | |
1903 the corresponding memory is the sum of the bytes needed for each of the | |
1904 succeeding initializers. | |
1905 | |
1906 Note that a compound initializer can't be used as a simple initializer of | |
1907 another compound initializer (i.e. nested compound initializers are not | |
1908 allowed). | |
1909 | |
1910 **Syntax**:: | |
1911 | |
1912 initializers N { <A> | |
1913 ... | |
1914 } | |
1915 | |
1916 **Record**:: | |
1917 | |
1918 AA: <1, N> | |
1919 | |
1920 **Semantics**: | |
1921 | |
1922 Defines that the next `N` initializers should be associated with the global | |
1923 address of the previous record. | |
1924 | |
1925 **Constraints**:: | |
1926 | |
1927 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
1928 ExpectedInitializers == 1 | |
1929 | |
1930 **Updates**:: | |
1931 | |
1932 ExpectedInitializers = N; | |
1933 | |
1934 **Examples**:: | |
1935 | |
1936 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
1937 48:0| 3: <1, 0> | count 0; | |
1938 50:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1939 52:0| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1940 60:0| 3: <5, 2> | count 2; | |
1941 62:4| 3: <0, 0, 1> | const @g0, align 0, | |
1942 65:6| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
1943 68:2| 3: <2, 8> | zerofill 8; | |
1944 70:6| 3: <3, 3, 2, 1, 0> | { 3, 2, 1, 0} | |
1945 | | } | |
1946 75:4| 3: <0, 0, 0> | var @g1, align 0, | |
1947 78:6| 3: <1, 2> | initializers 2 { | |
1948 81:2| 3: <3, 1, 2, 3, 4> | { 1, 2, 3, 4} | |
1949 86:0| 3: <2, 2> | zerofill 2; | |
1950 | | } | |
1951 88:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1952 | |
1953 .. _link_for_valuesymtab_block_section: | |
1954 | |
1955 Valuesymtab Block | |
1956 ================= | |
1957 | |
1958 The valuesymtab block does not define any values. Its only goal is to associate | |
1959 text names with external :ref:`function | |
1960 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>`. Each association is defined by a | |
1961 record in the valuesymtab block. Currently, only | |
1962 :ref:`intrinsic<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>` function addresses and | |
1963 the (external) start function (``_start``) can be named. All named function | |
1964 addresses must be external. Each record in the valuesymtab block is a *entry* | |
1965 record, defining a single name association. | |
1966 | |
1967 Entry Record | |
1968 ------------ | |
1969 | |
1970 The *entry* record defines a name for a function address. | |
1971 | |
1972 **Syntax**:: | |
1973 | |
1974 V : "NAME"; <A> | |
1975 | |
1976 **Record**:: | |
1977 | |
1978 AA: <1, B1, ... , BN> | |
1979 | |
1980 **Semantics**: | |
1981 | |
1982 The *entry* record defines a name ``NAME`` for function address ``V``. ``NAME`` is a | |
1983 sequence of ANSCII characters ``B1`` through ``BN``. | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:56
ASCII
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
1984 | |
1985 **Examples**:: | |
1986 | |
1987 72:0| 3: <8, 4, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
1988 | | void @f0(i32, i32, i32, i32, i1); | |
1989 76:6| 3: <8, 4, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
1990 | | void @f1(i32, i32, i32, i32, i1); | |
1991 81:4| 3: <8, 5, 0, 0, 0> | define external void @f2(i32); | |
1992 86:2| 1: <65535, 19, 2> | globals { // BlockID = 19 | |
1993 92:0| 3: <5, 0> | count 0; | |
1994 94:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
1995 96:0| 1: <65535, 14, 2> | valuesymtab { // BlockID = 14 | |
1996 104:0| 3: <1, 1, 108, 108, 118, | @f1 : "llvm.memmove.p0i8.p0i8.i32"; | |
1997 | 109, 46, 109, 101, | | |
1998 | 109, 109, 111, 118, | | |
1999 | 101, 46, 112, 48, | | |
2000 | 105, 56, 46, 112, 48,| | |
2001 | 105, 56, 46, 105, 51,| | |
2002 | 50> | | |
2003 145:4| 3: <1, 2, 95, 115, 116, | @f2 : "_start"; | |
2004 | 97, 114, 116> | | |
2005 157:0| 3: <1, 0, 108, 108, 118, | @f0 : "llvm.memcpy.p0i8.p0i8.i32"; | |
2006 | 109, 46, 109, 101, | | |
2007 | 109, 99, 112, 121, | | |
2008 | 46, 112, 48, 105, 56,| | |
2009 | 46, 112, 48, 105, 56,| | |
2010 | 46, 105, 51, 50> | | |
2011 197:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
2012 | |
2013 .. _link_for_module_block: | |
2014 | |
2015 Module Block | |
2016 ============ | |
2017 | |
2018 The module block, like all blocks, is enclosed in a pair of | |
2019 :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` / | |
2020 :ref:`exit<link_for_exit_block_record_section>` records, using block ID 8. A | |
2021 well-formed module block consists of the following records (in order): | |
2022 | |
2023 A version record | |
2024 The :ref:`version record<link_for_version_record>` communicates which version | |
2025 of the PNaCl bitcode reader/writer should be used. Note that this is | |
2026 different than the PNaCl bitcode (ABI) version. The PNaCl bitcode (ABI) | |
2027 version defines what is expected in records, and is defined in the header | |
2028 record of the bitcode file. The version record defines the version of the | |
2029 PNaCl bitcode reader/writer to use to convert records into bit sequences. | |
2030 | |
2031 Optional local abbreviations | |
2032 Defines a list of local :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>` | |
2033 to use for records within the module block. | |
2034 | |
2035 An abbreviations block | |
2036 The :ref:`abbreviations block<link_for_abbreviations_block_section>` defines | |
2037 user-defined, global abbreviations that are used to convert PNaCl records to | |
2038 bit sequences in blocks following the abbreviations block. | |
2039 | |
2040 A types block | |
2041 The :ref:`types block<link_for_types_block_section>` defines the set of all | |
2042 types used in the program. | |
2043 | |
2044 A non-empty sequence of function address records | |
2045 Each record defines a :ref:`function | |
2046 address<link_for_function_address_section>` used by the program. Function | |
2047 addresses must either be external, or defined internally by the program. If | |
2048 they are defined by the program, there must be a :ref:`function | |
2049 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>` (appearing later in the module) that | |
2050 defines the sequence of instructions for each defined function. | |
2051 | |
2052 A globals block defining the global variables. | |
2053 This :ref:`block<link_for_globals_block_section>` defines the set of | |
2054 global :ref:`variable<link_for_global_variable_address>` and | |
2055 :ref:`constant<link_for_global_constant_address>` addresses used by the | |
2056 program. In addition to the addresses, each global variable also defines how | |
2057 the corresponding global variable is initialized. | |
2058 | |
2059 An optional value symbol table block. | |
2060 This :ref:`block<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, if defined, provides | |
2061 textual names for :ref:`function | |
2062 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>` (previously defined in the | |
2063 module). Note that only names for intrinsic functions and the start function | |
2064 are specified. | |
2065 | |
2066 A sequence of function blocks. | |
2067 Each :ref:`function block<link_for_Function_blocks_section>` defines the | |
2068 corresponding intermediate representation for each defined function. The | |
2069 order of function blocks is used to associate them with :ref:`function | |
2070 addresses<link_for_function_address_section>`. The order of the defined | |
2071 function blocks must follow the same order as the corresponding function | |
2072 addresses defined in the module block. | |
2073 | |
2074 Descriptions of the :ref:`abbreviations<link_for_abbreviations_section>`, | |
2075 :ref:`types<link_for_types_block_section>`, | |
2076 :ref:`globals<link_for_globals_block_section>`, :ref:`value symbol | |
2077 table<link_for_valuesymtab_block_section>`, and | |
2078 :ref:`function<link_for_function_blocks_section>` blocks are not provided | |
2079 here. See the appropriate reference for more details. The following subsections | |
2080 describe each of the records that can appear in a module block. | |
2081 | |
2082 .. _link_for_version_record: | |
2083 | |
2084 Version Record | |
2085 -------------- | |
2086 | |
2087 The version record defines the implementation of the PNaCl bitstream | |
2088 reader/writer to use. That is, the implementation that converts PNaCl records to | |
2089 bit sequences, and converts them back to PNaCl records. Note that this is | |
2090 different than the PNaCl version of the bitcode file (encoded in the header | |
2091 record of the bitcode file). The PNaCl version defines the valid forms of PNaCl | |
2092 records. The version record is specific to the PNaCl version, and may have | |
2093 different values for different PNaCl versions. | |
2094 | |
2095 Note that currently, only PNaCl bitcode version 2, and version record value 1 is | |
2096 defined. | |
2097 | |
2098 **Syntax**:: | |
2099 | |
2100 version N; <A> | |
2101 | |
2102 **Record**:: | |
2103 | |
2104 AA: <1, N> | |
2105 | |
2106 **Semantics**: | |
2107 | |
2108 The version record defines which PNaCl reader/writer rules should be | |
2109 followed. ``N`` is the version number. Currently ``N`` must be 1. Future | |
2110 versions of PNaCl may define additional legal values. | |
2111 | |
2112 **Constraints**:: | |
2113 | |
2114 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
2115 | |
2116 *Examples*:: | |
2117 | |
2118 16:0|1: <65535, 8, 2> |module { // BlockID = 8 | |
2119 24:0| 3: <1, 1> | version 1; | |
2120 26:4| 1: <65535, 0, 2> | abbreviations { // BlockID = 0 | |
2121 36:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
2122 | |
2123 .. _link_for_function_address_section: | |
2124 | |
2125 Function Address | |
2126 ---------------- | |
2127 | |
2128 A function address record describes a function address. *Defined* function | |
2129 addresses define :ref:`implementations<link_for_function_blocks_section>` while | |
2130 *declared* function addresses do not. | |
2131 | |
2132 Since a PNaCl program is assumed to be a complete (statically linked) | |
2133 executable, All functions should be *defined* and *internal*. The exception to | |
2134 this are :ref:`intrinsic functions<link_for_intrinsic_functions_section>`, which | |
2135 should only be *declared* and *external*, since intrinsic functions will be | |
2136 automatically converted to appropriate code by the :ref:`PNaCl | |
2137 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>`. | |
2138 | |
2139 The implementation of a *defined* function address is provided by a | |
2140 corresponding function block, appearing later in the module block. The | |
2141 association of a *defined* function address with the corresponding function | |
2142 block is based on position. The *Nth* defined function address record, in the | |
2143 module block, has its implementation in the *Nth* function block of that module | |
2144 block. | |
2145 | |
2146 **Syntax**:: | |
2147 | |
2148 PN LN T0 @fN ( T1 , ... , TM ); <A> | |
2149 | |
2150 **Record**:: | |
2151 | |
2152 AA: <8, T, C, P, L> | |
2153 | |
2154 **Semantics**: | |
2155 | |
2156 Describes the function address ``@fN``. ``PN`` is the name that specifies the | |
2157 prototype value ``P`` associated with the function. A function address is | |
2158 *defined* only if ``P == 0``. Otherwise, it is only *declared*. The type of the | |
2159 function is :ref:`function type<link_for_function_type>` ``@tT``. ``L`` is the | |
2160 linkage specification corresponding to name ``LN``. ``C`` is the calling | |
2161 convention used by the function. | |
2162 | |
2163 Note that function signature must be defined by a function type in the types | |
2164 block. Hence, the return value must either be a primitive type, type ``void``, | |
2165 or a vector type. | |
2166 | |
2167 For ordinary functions, integer parameter and types can only be ``i32`` and | |
2168 ``i64``. All other integer types are not allowed. For intrinsic functions, all | |
2169 integer types are allowed. | |
2170 | |
2171 Valid prototype names ``PN``, and corresponding ``P`` values, are: | |
2172 | |
2173 = ======= | |
2174 P PN | |
2175 = ======= | |
2176 1 declare | |
2177 0 define | |
2178 = ======= | |
2179 | |
2180 Valid linkage names ``LN``, and corresponding ``L`` values, are: | |
2181 | |
2182 = ======== | |
2183 L LN | |
2184 = ======== | |
2185 3 internal | |
2186 0 external | |
2187 = ======== | |
2188 | |
2189 Currently, only one calling convention ``C`` is supported: | |
2190 | |
2191 = ==================== | |
2192 C Calling Convention | |
2193 = ==================== | |
2194 0 C calling convention | |
2195 = ==================== | |
2196 | |
2197 **Constraints**:: | |
2198 | |
2199 AA = AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2200 T = TypeID(TypeOf(T0 ( T1 , ... , TN ))) & | |
2201 N = NumFuncAddresses | |
2202 | |
2203 **Updates**:: | |
2204 | |
2205 ++NumFuncAddresses; | |
2206 TypeOf(@fN) = TypeOf(TypeID(i32)); | |
2207 TypeOfFcn(@fN) = TypeOf(@tT); | |
2208 | |
2209 if PN == 0: | |
2210 DefiningFcnIDs += @FN; | |
2211 ++NumDefinedFunctionAddresses; | |
2212 | |
2213 **Examples**:: | |
2214 | |
2215 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
2216 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
2217 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
2218 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
2219 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
2220 57:2| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
2221 59:0| 3: <21, 0, 2, 1> | @t4 = double (float); | |
2222 63:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0, 1, 0, 2>| @t5 = | |
2223 | | i32 (i32, float, i32, double); | |
2224 69:2| 3: <21, 0, 3> | @t6 = void (); | |
2225 72:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
2226 76:0| 3: <8, 4, 0, 1, 0> | declare external double @f0(float); | |
2227 80:6| 3: <8, 5, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
2228 | | i32 @f1(i32, float, i32, double); | |
2229 85:4| 3: <8, 6, 0, 0, 0> | define external void @f2(); | |
2230 | |
2231 .. _link_for_constants_block_section: | |
2232 | |
2233 Constants Blocks | |
2234 ================ | |
2235 | |
2236 Constants blocks define literal constants used within each function. Its intent | |
2237 it to define them once, before instructions. A constants block can only appear | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
is to define
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
2238 in a :ref:`function block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, and must appear | |
2239 before any instructions in the function block. | |
2240 | |
2241 Currently, only integer literals, floating point literals, and undefined vector | |
2242 constants can be defined. | |
2243 | |
2244 To minimize type information put in a constants block, the type information is | |
2245 separated from the constants. This allows a sequence of constants to be given | |
2246 the same type. This is done by defining a :ref:`set type | |
2247 record<link_for_constants_set_type_record>`, followed by a sequence of literal | |
2248 constants. These literal constants all get converted to the type of the | |
2249 preceding set type record. | |
2250 | |
2251 Note that constants that are used for switch case selectors should not be added | |
2252 to the constants block, since the switch instruction contains the constants used | |
2253 for case selectors. All other constants in the function block must be put into a | |
2254 constants block, so that instructions can use them. | |
2255 | |
2256 To make this more concrete, consider the following example constants block:: | |
2257 | |
2258 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2259 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
2260 118:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
2261 121:0| 3: <4, 4> | %c1 = i32 2; | |
2262 123:4| 3: <1, 2> | i8: | |
2263 126:0| 3: <4, 8> | %c2 = i8 4; | |
2264 128:4| 3: <4, 6> | %c3 = i8 3; | |
2265 131:0| 3: <1, 1> | float: | |
2266 133:4| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c4 = float 1; | |
2267 139:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
2268 | |
2269 .. _link_for_constants_set_type_record: | |
2270 | |
2271 Set Type Record | |
2272 --------------- | |
2273 | |
2274 The *set type* record defines the type to use for the (immediately) succeeding | |
2275 literals. | |
2276 | |
2277 **Syntax**:: | |
2278 | |
2279 T: <A> | |
2280 | |
2281 **Record**:: | |
2282 | |
2283 AA: <1, TT> | |
2284 | |
2285 **Semantics**: | |
2286 | |
2287 The *set type* record defines type ``T`` to be used to type the (immediately) | |
2288 succeeding literals. ``T`` must be a non-void primitive value type or a vector | |
2289 type. | |
2290 | |
2291 **Constraints**:: | |
2292 | |
2293 TT == TypeID(T) | |
2294 | |
2295 **Updates**:: | |
2296 | |
2297 ConstantsSetType = T; | |
2298 | |
2299 **Examples**:: | |
2300 | |
2301 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2302 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
2303 118:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
2304 121:0| 3: <4, 4> | %c1 = i32 2; | |
2305 123:4| 3: <1, 2> | i8: | |
2306 126:0| 3: <4, 8> | %c2 = i8 4; | |
2307 128:4| 3: <4, 6> | %c3 = i8 3; | |
2308 131:0| 3: <1, 1> | float: | |
2309 133:4| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c4 = float 1; | |
2310 139:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
2311 | |
2312 .. _link_for_undefined_literal: | |
2313 | |
2314 Undefined Literal | |
2315 ----------------- | |
2316 | |
2317 The *undefined* literal record creates an undefined literal for the type *T* | |
2318 defined by the preceding *set type* record. | |
2319 | |
2320 Note: See :ref:`insert element | |
2321 instruction<link_for_insert_element_instruction_section>` for an example of how | |
2322 you would use the undefined literal with vector types. | |
2323 | |
2324 **Syntax**:: | |
2325 | |
2326 %cN = T undef; <50> | |
2327 | |
2328 **Record**:: | |
2329 | |
2330 AA: <3> | |
2331 | |
2332 **Semantics**: | |
2333 | |
2334 The *undefined* literal record creates an undefined literal constant ``%cN`` for | |
2335 type ``T``. ``T`` must be the type defined by the preceding *set type* record, and | |
2336 be a primitive value type or a vector type. | |
2337 | |
2338 **Constraints**:: | |
2339 | |
2340 N == NumFcnConsts & | |
2341 T == ConstantsSetType & | |
2342 IsPrimitive(T) or IsVector(T) | |
2343 | |
2344 **Updates**:: | |
2345 | |
2346 ++NumFcnConsts; | |
2347 TypeOf(%cN) = T; | |
2348 | |
2349 **Examples**:: | |
2350 | |
2351 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
2352 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
2353 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
2354 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
2355 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
2356 57:2| 3: <12, 4, 0> | @t3 = <4 x i32>; | |
2357 60:4| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t4 = void (); | |
2358 63:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
2359 ... | |
2360 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2361 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
2362 118:4| 3: <3> | %c0 = i32 undef; | |
2363 120:2| 3: <4, 2> | %c1 = i32 1; | |
2364 122:6| 3: <1, 3> | <4 x i32>: | |
2365 125:2| 3: <3> | %c2 = <4 x i32> undef; | |
2366 127:0| 3: <1, 1> | float: | |
2367 129:4| 3: <3> | %c3 = float undef; | |
2368 131:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
2369 | |
2370 .. _link_for_integer_literal: | |
2371 | |
2372 Integer Literal | |
2373 --------------- | |
2374 | |
2375 The *integer literal* record creates an integer literal for the integer type *T* | |
2376 defined by the preceding *set type* record. | |
2377 | |
2378 **Syntax**:: | |
2379 | |
2380 %cN = T V; <A> | |
2381 | |
2382 **Record**:: | |
2383 | |
2384 AA: <4, VV> | |
2385 | |
2386 **Semantics**: | |
2387 | |
2388 The *integer literal* record creates an integer literal constant ``%cN`` for | |
2389 type ``T``. ``T`` must be the type defined by the preceding *set type* record, | |
2390 and an integer type. The literal ``V`` can be signed, but must be definable by | |
2391 type ``T``. | |
2392 | |
2393 **Constraints**:: | |
2394 | |
2395 N == NumFcnConsts & | |
2396 T == ConstantsSetType & | |
2397 VV == SignRotate(V) & | |
2398 IsInteger(T) | |
2399 | |
2400 **Updates**:: | |
2401 | |
2402 TypeOf(%cN) = T; | |
2403 | |
2404 **Examples**:: | |
2405 | |
2406 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
2407 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
2408 50:4| 3: <7, 8> | @t0 = i8; | |
2409 53:0| 3: <7, 16> | @t1 = i16; | |
2410 55:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t2 = i32; | |
2411 58:6| 3: <7, 64> | @t3 = i64; | |
2412 62:0| 3: <7, 1> | @t4 = i1; | |
2413 64:4| 3: <2> | @t5 = void; | |
2414 66:2| 3: <21, 0, 5> | @t6 = void (); | |
2415 69:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
2416 ... | |
2417 114:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2418 124:0| 3: <1, 0> | i8: | |
2419 126:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i8 1; | |
2420 129:0| 3: <4, 4> | %c1 = i8 2; | |
2421 131:4| 3: <1, 1> | i16: | |
2422 134:0| 3: <4, 6> | %c2 = i16 3; | |
2423 136:4| 3: <4, 8> | %c3 = i16 4; | |
2424 139:0| 3: <1, 2> | i32: | |
2425 141:4| 3: <4, 10> | %c4 = i32 5; | |
2426 144:0| 3: <4, 12> | %c5 = i32 6; | |
2427 146:4| 3: <1, 3> | i64: | |
2428 149:0| 3: <4, 3> | %c6 = i64 -1; | |
2429 151:4| 3: <4, 5> | %c7 = i64 -2; | |
2430 154:0| 3: <1, 4> | i1: | |
2431 156:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c8 = i1 1; | |
2432 159:0| 3: <4, 0> | %c9 = i1 0; | |
2433 161:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
2434 | |
2435 Floating Point Literal | |
2436 ---------------------- | |
2437 | |
2438 The *floating point literal* record creates a floating point literal for the | |
2439 floating point type *T* defined by the preceding *set type* record. | |
2440 | |
2441 **Syntax**:: | |
2442 | |
2443 %cN = T V; <A> | |
2444 | |
2445 **Record**:: | |
2446 | |
2447 AA: <6, VV> | |
2448 | |
2449 **Semantics**: | |
2450 | |
2451 The *floating point literal* record creates a floating point literal constant | |
2452 ``%cN`` for type ``T``. ``T`` must the type type defined by the preceding *set | |
2453 type* record, and be a floating point type. The literal ``V`` is the floating | |
2454 value to be defined. The value ``VV`` if the corresponding IEEE unsigned integer | |
2455 that defines value ``V``. That is, the literal ``VV`` must be a valid IEEE 754 | |
2456 32-bit (unsigned integer) value if ``T`` is ``float``, and a valid IEEE 754 | |
2457 64-bit (unsigned integer) value if ``T`` is ``double``. | |
2458 | |
2459 **Constraints**:: | |
2460 | |
2461 N == NumFcnConsts | |
2462 T == ConstantsSetType | |
2463 IsFloat(T) | |
2464 | |
2465 **Updates**:: | |
2466 | |
2467 TypeOf(%cN) = T; | |
2468 | |
2469 **Examples**:: | |
2470 | |
2471 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
2472 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
2473 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
2474 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
2475 54:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
2476 55:6| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t3 = void (); | |
2477 59:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
2478 ... | |
2479 102:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2480 112:0| 3: <1, 0> | float: | |
2481 114:4| 3: <6, 0> | %c0 = float 0; | |
2482 117:0| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c1 = float 1; | |
2483 123:2| 3: <6, 1088421888> | %c2 = float 7; | |
2484 130:2| 3: <6, 1090519040> | %c3 = float 8; | |
2485 137:2| 3: <3> | %c4 = float undef; | |
2486 139:0| 3: <6, 2143289344> | %c5 = float nan; | |
2487 146:0| 3: <6, 2139095040> | %c6 = float inf; | |
2488 153:0| 3: <6, 4286578688> | %c7 = float -inf; | |
2489 160:0| 3: <1, 1> | double: | |
2490 162:4| 3: <6, | %c8 = double 1; | |
2491 | 4607182418800017408> | | |
2492 174:0| 3: <6, 0> | %c9 = double 0; | |
2493 176:4| 3: <6, | %c10 = double 5; | |
2494 | 4617315517961601024> | | |
2495 188:0| 3: <6, | %c11 = double 6; | |
2496 | 4618441417868443648> | | |
2497 199:4| 3: <6, | %c12 = double nan; | |
2498 | 9221120237041090560> | | |
2499 211:0| 3: <6, | %c13 = double inf; | |
2500 | 9218868437227405312> | | |
2501 222:4| 3: <6, | %c14 = double -inf; | |
2502 | 18442240474082181120>| | |
2503 234:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
2504 | |
2505 .. _link_for_function_blocks_section: | |
2506 | |
2507 Function Blocks | |
2508 =============== | |
2509 | |
2510 A function block defines the implementation of a defined :ref:`function | |
2511 address<link_for_function_address_section>`. The function address it defines is | |
2512 based on the position of the corresponding defined function address. The Nth | |
2513 defined function address always corresponds to the Nth function block in the | |
2514 module block. | |
2515 | |
2516 A function implementation contains a list of basic blocks, forming the control | |
2517 flow graph. Each *basic block* contains a list of instructions, and ends with a | |
2518 :ref:`terminator instruction<link_for_terminator_instruction_section>` | |
2519 (e.g. branch). | |
2520 | |
2521 Basic blocks are not represented by records. Rather, context is implicit. The | |
2522 first basic block begins with the first instruction record in the function | |
2523 block. Block boundaries are determined by terminator instructions. The | |
2524 instruction that follows a terminator instruction begins a new basic block. | |
2525 | |
2526 The first basic block in a function is special in two ways: it is immediately | |
2527 executed on entrance to the function, and it is not allowed to have predecessor | |
2528 basic blocks (i.e. there can't be any branches to the entry block of a | |
2529 function). Because the entry block has no predecessors, it also can't have any | |
2530 :ref:`phi<link_for_phi_instruction_section>` instructions. | |
2531 | |
2532 The parameters are implied by the type of the corresponding function | |
2533 address. One parameter is defined for each argument of the function :ref:`type | |
2534 signature<link_for_function_type>` of the corresponding :ref:`function | |
2535 address<link_for_function_address_section>`. | |
2536 | |
2537 The number of basic blocks is defined by the :ref:`count | |
2538 record<link_for_basic_blocks_count>`. Each ::ref::`terminator | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:43
::ref:: ==> :ref: (I think)
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
2539 instruction<link_for_terminator_instruction_section>` ends the current basic | |
2540 block, and the next instruction begins a new basic block. Basic blocks are | |
2541 numbered by the order they appear (starting with index 0). Basic block IDs have | |
2542 the form ``%bN``, where ``N`` corresponds to the position of the basic block | |
2543 within the function block. | |
2544 | |
2545 Each instruction, within a function block, corresponds to a corresponding PNaCl | |
2546 record. The layout of a function block is the (basic block) count record, | |
2547 followed by a sequence of instruction records. | |
2548 | |
2549 For readability, PNaClAsm introduces basic block IDs. These basic block IDs do | |
2550 not correspond to PNaCl records, since basic block boundaries are defined | |
2551 implicitly, after terminator instructions. They appear only for readability. | |
2552 | |
2553 Operands of instructions are defined using an :ref:`absolute | |
2554 index<link_for_absolute_index_section>`. This absolute index implicitly encodes | |
2555 function addresses, global addresses, parameters, constants, and instructions | |
2556 that generate values. The encoding takes advantage of the implied ordering of | |
2557 these values in the bitcode file, defining a contiguous sequence of indices for | |
2558 each kind of identifier. That is, indices are ordered by putting function | |
2559 address identifiers first, followed by global address identifiers, followed by | |
2560 parameter identifiers, followed by constant identifiers, and lastly instruction | |
2561 value identifiers. | |
2562 | |
2563 To save space in the encoded bitcode file, most operands are encoded using a | |
2564 :ref:`relative index<link_for_relative_index>` value, rather than | |
2565 :ref:`absolute<link_for_absolute_index_section>`. This | |
2566 is done because most instruction operands refer to values defined earlier in the | |
2567 (same) basic block. As a result, the relative distance (back) from the next | |
2568 value defining instruction is frequently a small number. Small numbers tend to | |
2569 require fewer bits when they are converted to bit sequences. | |
2570 | |
2571 Note that instructions that can appear in a function block are defined in sectio ns | |
2572 :ref:`link_for_terminator_instruction_section`, | |
2573 :ref:`link_for_integer_binary_instructions`, | |
2574 :ref:`link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions`, | |
2575 :ref:`link_for_memory_creation_and_access_instructions`, | |
2576 :ref:`link_for_conversion_instructions`, | |
2577 :ref:`link_for_compare_instructions`, | |
2578 :ref:`link_for_vector_instructions`, and | |
2579 :ref:`link_for_other_pnaclasm_instructions`. | |
2580 | |
2581 The following subsections define the remaining records that can appear in a | |
2582 function block. | |
2583 | |
2584 Function Enter | |
2585 -------------- | |
2586 | |
2587 PNaClAsm defines a function enter block construct. The corresponding record is | |
2588 simply an :ref:`enter block<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` record, with | |
2589 BlockID value ``12``. All context about the defining address is implicit by the | |
2590 position of the function block, and the corresponding defining :ref:`function | |
2591 address<link_for_function_address_section>`. To improve readability, PNaClAsm | |
2592 includes the function signature into the syntax rule. | |
2593 | |
2594 **Syntax**:: | |
2595 | |
2596 function TR @fN ( T0 %p0, ... , TM %pM ) { <B> | |
2597 | |
2598 **Record**:: | |
2599 | |
2600 1: <65535, 12, B> | |
2601 | |
2602 **Semantics**: | |
2603 | |
2604 ``B`` is the number of bits reserved for abbreviations in the block. If it is | |
2605 omitted, 2 is assumed. See :ref:`enter<link_for_enter_block_record_section>` | |
2606 block records for more details. | |
2607 | |
2608 The value of ``N`` corresponds to the positional index of the corresponding | |
2609 defining function address this block is associated with. ``M`` is the number of | |
2610 defined parameters (minus one) in the function heading. | |
2611 | |
2612 **Constraints**:: | |
2613 | |
2614 N == NumFcnImpls & | |
2615 @fN in DefiningFcnIDs & | |
2616 TypeOfFcn(@fN) == TypeOf(TypeID(TR (T0, ... , TM))) | |
2617 | |
2618 **Updates**:: | |
2619 | |
2620 ++NumFcnImpls; | |
2621 EnclosingFcnID = @fN; | |
2622 NumBasicBlocks = 0; | |
2623 ExpectedBlocks = 0; | |
2624 NumParams = M; | |
2625 for I in [0..M]: | |
2626 TypeOf(%pI) = TypeOf(TypeID(TI)); | |
2627 | |
2628 **Examples**:: | |
2629 | |
2630 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
2631 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
2632 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
2633 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
2634 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 1> | @t2 = void (); | |
2635 58:6| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0> | @t3 = i32 (i32); | |
2636 62:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
2637 ... | |
2638 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
2639 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2640 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
2641 | | %b0: | |
2642 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
2643 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
2644 120:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
2645 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2646 128:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
2647 | | %b0: | |
2648 130:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %p0; | |
2649 133:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
2650 | |
2651 .. _link_for_basic_blocks_count: | |
2652 | |
2653 Count Record | |
2654 ------------ | |
2655 | |
2656 The count record, within a function block, defines the number of basic blocks | |
2657 used to define the function implementation. It must be the first record in the | |
2658 function block. | |
2659 | |
2660 **Syntax**:: | |
2661 | |
2662 blocks: N; <A> | |
2663 %b0: | |
2664 | |
2665 **Record**:: | |
2666 | |
2667 AA: <1, N> | |
2668 | |
2669 **Semantics**: | |
2670 | |
2671 The count record defines the number ``N`` of basic blocks in the implemented | |
2672 function. | |
2673 | |
2674 **Constraints**:: | |
2675 | |
2676 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2677 ExpectedBasicBlocks == N & | |
2678 NumBasicBlocks == 0 | |
2679 | |
2680 **Updates**:: | |
2681 | |
2682 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
2683 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2684 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
2685 | | %b0: | |
2686 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
2687 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
2688 120:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
2689 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2690 128:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
2691 | | %b0: | |
2692 130:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %p0; | |
2693 133:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
2694 | |
2695 .. _link_for_terminator_instruction_section: | |
2696 | |
2697 Terminator Instructions | |
2698 ======================= | |
2699 | |
2700 Terminator instructions are instructions that appear in a :ref:`function | |
2701 block<link_for_function_blocks_section>`, and define the end of the current | |
2702 basic block. A terminator instruction indicates which block should be executed | |
2703 after the current block is finished. The function block is well formed only if | |
2704 the number of terminator instructions, in the function block, corresponds to the | |
2705 value defined by the corresponding function basic block :ref:`count | |
2706 record<link_for_basic_blocks_count>`. | |
2707 | |
2708 Note that any branch instruction to label ``%bN``, where ``N >= | |
2709 ExpectedBasicBlocks``, is illegal. For ease of readability, this constraint | |
2710 hasn't been put on branch instructions. Rather it is only implied. | |
2711 | |
2712 In addition, it must be the case that ``NumBasicBlocks < ExpectedBasicBlocks``, | |
2713 and will not be listed as a constraint. Further, if ``B = NumBasicBlocks + 1`` | |
2714 is the number associated with the next basic block. Label `%bB:` only appears | |
2715 if:: | |
2716 | |
2717 B < ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
2718 | |
2719 That is, the label is omitted only if this terminator instruction is the last | |
2720 instruction in the function block. | |
2721 | |
2722 Return Void Instruction | |
2723 ----------------------- | |
2724 | |
2725 The return void instruction is used to return control from a function back to | |
2726 the caller, without returning any value. | |
2727 | |
2728 **Syntax**:: | |
2729 | |
2730 ret void; <A> | |
2731 %bB: | |
2732 | |
2733 **Record**:: | |
2734 | |
2735 AA: <10> | |
2736 | |
2737 **Semantics**: | |
2738 | |
2739 The return void instruction returns control to the calling function. | |
2740 | |
2741 **Constraints**:: | |
2742 | |
2743 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2744 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
2745 ReturnType(TypeOf(EnclosingFcnID)) == void | |
2746 | |
2747 **Updates**:: | |
2748 | |
2749 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
2750 | |
2751 **Examples**:: | |
2752 | |
2753 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
2754 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2755 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
2756 | | %b0: | |
2757 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
2758 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
2759 | |
2760 Return Value Instruction | |
2761 ------------------------ | |
2762 | |
2763 The return value instruction is used to return control from a function back to | |
2764 the caller, including a value. The value must correspond to the return type of | |
2765 the enclosing function. | |
2766 | |
2767 **Syntax**:: | |
2768 | |
2769 ret T V; <A> | |
2770 %bB: | |
2771 | |
2772 **Record**:: | |
2773 | |
2774 AA: <10, VV> | |
2775 | |
2776 **Semantics**: | |
2777 | |
2778 The return value instruction returns control to the calling function, returning | |
2779 the provided value. | |
2780 | |
2781 ``V`` is the value to return. Type ``T`` must be of the type returned by the | |
2782 function. It must also be the type associated with value ``V``. | |
2783 | |
2784 The return type ``T`` must either be a (non-void) primitive type, or a vector | |
2785 type. If the function block is implementing an ordinary function, and the return | |
2786 type is an integer type, it must be either ``i32`` or ``i64``. | |
2787 | |
2788 **Constraints**:: | |
2789 | |
2790 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2791 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
2792 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
2793 T == TypeOf(V) == ReturnType(TypeOf(EnclosingFcnID)) | |
2794 | |
2795 **Updates**:: | |
2796 | |
2797 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
2798 | |
2799 **Examples**:: | |
2800 | |
2801 120:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
2802 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2803 128:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
2804 | | %b0: | |
2805 130:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %p0; | |
2806 | |
2807 Unconditional Branch Instruction | |
2808 -------------------------------- | |
2809 | |
2810 The unconditional branch instruction is used to cause control flow to transfer | |
2811 to a different basic block of the function. | |
2812 | |
2813 **Syntax**:: | |
2814 | |
2815 br %bN; <A> | |
2816 %bB: | |
2817 | |
2818 **Record**:: | |
2819 | |
2820 AA: <11, N> | |
2821 | |
2822 **Semantics**: | |
2823 | |
2824 The unconditional branch instruction causes control flow to transfer to basic | |
2825 block ``N``. | |
2826 | |
2827 **Constraints**:: | |
2828 | |
2829 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2830 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
2831 0 < N & | |
2832 N < ExpectedBasicBlocks | |
2833 | |
2834 **Updates**:: | |
2835 | |
2836 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
2837 | |
2838 **Examples**:: | |
2839 | |
2840 88:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
2841 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2842 96:0| 3: <1, 5> | blocks 5; | |
2843 | | %b0: | |
2844 98:4| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
2845 | | %b1: | |
2846 101:0| 3: <11, 4> | br label %b4; | |
2847 | | %b2: | |
2848 103:4| 3: <11, 1> | br label %b1; | |
2849 | | %b3: | |
2850 106:0| 3: <11, 2> | br label %b2; | |
2851 | | %b4: | |
2852 108:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
2853 110:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
2854 | |
2855 Conditional Branch Instruction | |
2856 ------------------------------ | |
2857 | |
2858 The conditional branch instruction is used to cause control flow to transfer to | |
2859 a different basic block of the function, based on a boolean test condition. | |
2860 | |
2861 **Syntax**:: | |
2862 | |
2863 br i1 C, %bT, %bBF; <A> | |
2864 %bB: | |
2865 | |
2866 **Record**:: | |
2867 | |
2868 AA: <11, T, F, CC> | |
2869 | |
2870 **Semantics**: | |
2871 | |
2872 Upon execution of a conditional branch instruction, the *i1* (boolean) argument | |
2873 ``C`` is evaluated. If the value is ``true``, control flows to basic block | |
2874 ``%bT``. Otherwise control flows to basic block ``%bF``. | |
2875 | |
2876 **Constraints**:: | |
2877 | |
2878 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2879 CC == RelativeIndex(C) & | |
2880 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
2881 0 < T & | |
2882 B1 < ExpectedBasicBlocks & | |
2883 0 < F & | |
2884 B2 < ExpectedBasicBlocks & | |
2885 TypeOf(C) == i1 | |
2886 | |
2887 **Updates**:: | |
2888 | |
2889 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
2890 | |
2891 **Examples**:: | |
2892 | |
2893 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
2894 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2895 100:0| 3: <1, 5> | blocks 5; | |
2896 102:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2897 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | i1: | |
2898 114:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
2899 117:0| 3: <4, 0> | %c1 = i1 0; | |
2900 119:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
2901 | | %b0: | |
2902 120:0| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
2903 | | %b1: | |
2904 122:4| 3: <11, 2, 4, 2> | br i1 %c0, label %b2, label %b4; | |
2905 | | %b2: | |
2906 126:4| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
2907 | | %b3: | |
2908 129:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
2909 | | %b4: | |
2910 130:6| 3: <11, 2, 3, 1> | br i1 %c1, label %b2, label %b3; | |
2911 134:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
2912 | |
2913 Unreachable | |
2914 ----------- | |
2915 | |
2916 The unreachable instruction has no defined semantics. The instruction is used to | |
2917 inform the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` that control | |
2918 can't reach this instruction. | |
2919 | |
2920 **Syntax**:: | |
2921 | |
2922 unreachable; <A> | |
2923 %bB: | |
2924 | |
2925 **Record**:: | |
2926 | |
2927 AA: <15> | |
2928 | |
2929 **Semantics**: | |
2930 | |
2931 Directive to the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` that | |
2932 this instruction is unreachable. | |
2933 | |
2934 **Constraints**:: | |
2935 | |
2936 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) | |
2937 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
2938 | |
2939 **Updates**:: | |
2940 | |
2941 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
2942 | |
2943 **Examples**:: | |
2944 | |
2945 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
2946 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
2947 116:0| 3: <1, 5> | blocks 5; | |
2948 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
2949 128:0| 3: <1, 2> | i1: | |
2950 130:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
2951 133:0| 3: <4, 0> | %c1 = i1 0; | |
2952 135:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
2953 | | %b0: | |
2954 136:0| 3: <11, 1, 2, 2> | br i1 %c0, label %b1, label %b2; | |
2955 | | %b1: | |
2956 140:0| 3: <11, 3, 4, 1> | br i1 %c1, label %b3, label %b4; | |
2957 | | %b2: | |
2958 144:0| 3: <15> | unreachable; | |
2959 | | %b3: | |
2960 145:6| 3: <15> | unreachable; | |
2961 | | %b4: | |
2962 147:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
2963 149:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
2964 | |
2965 Switch Instruction | |
2966 ------------------ | |
2967 | |
2968 The *switch* instruction transfers control flow to one of several different | |
2969 places, based on a selector value. It is a generalization of the conditional | |
2970 branch instruction. | |
2971 | |
2972 **Syntax**:: | |
2973 | |
2974 switch T V0 { | |
2975 default: br label %bB0; | |
2976 T V1: br label %bB1; | |
2977 ... | |
2978 T VN: br label %bBN; | |
2979 } <A> | |
2980 %bB: | |
2981 | |
2982 **Record**:: | |
2983 | |
2984 AA: <12, TT, B0, N, (1, 1, VVI, BI | 1 <= i <= N)> | |
2985 | |
2986 **Semantics**: | |
2987 | |
2988 The switch instruction transfers control to a basic block in ``B0`` through | |
2989 ``BN``. Value ``V`` is used to conditionally select which block to branch | |
2990 to. ``T`` is the type of ``V`` and ``V1`` through ``VN``, and must be an integer | |
2991 type. Value ``V1`` through ``VN`` are integers to compare against ``V``. If sele ctor | |
2992 ``V`` matches ``VI`` (for some ``I``, ``1 <= I <= N``), then the instruction bra nches to | |
2993 block ``BI``. If ``V`` is not in ``V1`` through ``VN``, the instruction branches to | |
2994 block ``B0``. | |
2995 | |
2996 **Constraints**:: | |
2997 | |
2998 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
2999 B == NumBasicBlocks + 1 & | |
3000 TT == TypeID(T) & | |
3001 VI == SignRotate(VI) for all I, 1 <= I <= N & | |
3002 | |
3003 **Updates**:: | |
3004 | |
3005 ++NumBasicBlocks; | |
3006 | |
3007 **Examples**:: | |
3008 | |
3009 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
3010 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3011 124:0| 3: <1, 6> | blocks 6; | |
3012 | | %b0: | |
3013 126:4| 3: <12, 1, 1, 2, 4, 1, 1,| switch i32 %p0 { | |
3014 | 2, 3, 1, 1, 4, 3, 1, | default: br label %b2; | |
3015 | 1, 8, 4, 1, 1, 10, 4>| i32 1: br label %b3; | |
3016 | | i32 2: br label %b3; | |
3017 | | i32 4: br label %b4; | |
3018 | | i32 5: br label %b4; | |
3019 | | } | |
3020 | | %b1: | |
3021 143:2| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3022 | | %b2: | |
3023 145:6| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3024 | | %b3: | |
3025 148:2| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3026 | | %b4: | |
3027 150:6| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3028 | | %b5: | |
3029 153:2| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
3030 155:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3031 156:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f1(i64 %p0) { | |
3032 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3033 164:0| 3: <1, 6> | blocks 6; | |
3034 | | %b0: | |
3035 166:4| 3: <12, 2, 1, 2, 4, 1, 1,| switch i64 %p0 { | |
3036 | 2, 3, 1, 1, 4, 3, 1, | default: br label %b2; | |
3037 | 1, 8, 4, 1, 1, | i64 1: br label %b3; | |
3038 | 39777555332, 4> | i64 2: br label %b3; | |
3039 | | i64 4: br label %b4; | |
3040 | | i64 19888777666: br label %b4; | |
3041 | | } | |
3042 | | %b1: | |
3043 188:4| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3044 | | %b2: | |
3045 191:0| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3046 | | %b3: | |
3047 193:4| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3048 | | %b4: | |
3049 196:0| 3: <11, 5> | br label %b5; | |
3050 | | %b5: | |
3051 198:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
3052 200:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
3053 | |
3054 .. _link_for_integer_binary_instructions: | |
3055 | |
3056 Integer Binary Instructions | |
3057 =========================== | |
3058 | |
3059 Binary instructions are used to do most of the computation in a program. This | |
3060 section focuses on binary instructions that operator on integer values, or | |
3061 vectors of integer values. | |
3062 | |
3063 All binary operations require two operands of the same type, execute an | |
3064 operation on them, and produce a value. The value may represent multiple values | |
3065 if the type is a vector type. The result value always has the same type as its | |
3066 operands. | |
3067 | |
3068 Some integer binary operations can be applied to both signed and unsigned | |
3069 integers. Others, the sign is significant. In general, if the sign plays a role | |
3070 in the instruction, the sign information is encoded into the name of the | |
3071 instruction. | |
3072 | |
3073 For most binary operations (except some of the logical operations), integer | |
3074 type i1 is disallowed. | |
3075 | |
3076 Integer Add | |
3077 ----------- | |
3078 | |
3079 The integer add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. Both arguments | |
3080 and the result must be of the same type. That type must be integer, or an | |
3081 integer vector type. | |
3082 | |
3083 **Syntax**:: | |
3084 | |
3085 %vN = add T V1, V2; <A> | |
3086 | |
3087 **Record**:: | |
3088 | |
3089 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 0> | |
3090 | |
3091 **Semantics**: | |
3092 | |
3093 The integer add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. Arguments | |
3094 ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be | |
3095 an integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is defined by the record | |
3096 position, defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3097 | |
3098 The result returned is the mathematical result modulo 2\ :sup:`n`\ , where ``n`` is | |
3099 the bitwidth of the integer result. | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:55
Could you make this "bit width" or "bit-width", he
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
3100 | |
3101 Because integers are assumed to use a two's complement representation, | |
3102 this instruction is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers. | |
3103 | |
3104 In the add instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of integer type | |
3105 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
3106 | |
3107 **Constraints**:: | |
3108 | |
3109 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3110 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3111 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3112 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3113 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3114 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3115 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3116 | |
3117 **Updates**:: | |
3118 | |
3119 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3120 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3121 | |
3122 **Examples**:: | |
3123 | |
3124 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3125 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3126 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3127 | | %b0: | |
3128 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3129 110:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 0> | %v1 = add i32 %p0, %v0; | |
3130 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3131 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3132 | |
3133 Integer Subtract | |
3134 ---------------- | |
3135 | |
3136 The integer subtract instruction returns the difference of its two arguments. | |
3137 Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be | |
3138 integer, or an integer vector type. | |
3139 | |
3140 Note: Since there isn't a negate instruction, subtraction from constant zero | |
3141 should be used to negate values. | |
3142 | |
3143 **Syntax**:: | |
3144 | |
3145 %vN = sub T V1, V2; <A> | |
3146 | |
3147 **Record**:: | |
3148 | |
3149 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 1> | |
3150 | |
3151 **Semantics**: | |
3152 | |
3153 The integer subtract returns the difference of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1 `` | |
3154 and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integ er | |
3155 type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, | |
3156 defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3157 | |
3158 The result returned is the mathematical result modulo 2\ :sup:`n`\ , where ``n`` is | |
3159 the bitwidth of the integer result. | |
3160 | |
3161 Because integers are assumed to use a two's complement representation, | |
3162 this instruction is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers. | |
3163 | |
3164 In the subtract instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of integer type | |
3165 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
3166 | |
3167 **Constraints**:: | |
3168 | |
3169 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3170 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3171 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3172 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3173 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3174 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3175 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3176 | |
3177 **Updates**:: | |
3178 | |
3179 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3180 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3181 | |
3182 **Examples**:: | |
3183 | |
3184 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3185 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3186 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3187 | | %b0: | |
3188 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 1> | %v0 = sub i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3189 110:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 1> | %v1 = sub i32 %p0, %v0; | |
3190 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3191 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3192 | |
3193 Integer Multiply | |
3194 ---------------- | |
3195 | |
3196 The integer multiply instruction returns the product of its two arguments. Both | |
3197 arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be integer, | |
3198 or an integer based vector type. | |
3199 | |
3200 **Syntax**:: | |
3201 | |
3202 &vN = mul T V1, V2; <A> | |
3203 | |
3204 **Record**:: | |
3205 | |
3206 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 2> | |
3207 | |
3208 **Semantics**: | |
3209 | |
3210 The integer multiply instruction returns the product of its two | |
3211 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type | |
3212 ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is | |
3213 defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
3214 the instruction. | |
3215 | |
3216 The result returned is the mathematical result modulo 2\ :sup:`n`\ , where ``n`` is | |
3217 the bitwidth of the integer result. | |
3218 | |
3219 Because integers are assumed to use a two's complement representation, | |
3220 this instruction is appropriate for both signed and unsigned integers. | |
3221 | |
3222 In the subtract instruction, integer type ``i1`` (or a vector on integer type | |
3223 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
3224 | |
3225 **Constraints**:: | |
3226 | |
3227 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3228 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3229 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3230 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3231 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3232 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3233 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3234 | |
3235 **Updates**:: | |
3236 | |
3237 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3238 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3239 | |
3240 **Examples**:: | |
3241 | |
3242 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3243 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3244 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3245 | | %b0: | |
3246 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 2> | %v0 = mul i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3247 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 3, 2> | %v1 = mul i32 %v0, %p0; | |
3248 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3249 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3250 | |
3251 Signed Integer Divide | |
3252 --------------------- | |
3253 | |
3254 The signed integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two arguments. | |
3255 Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be | |
3256 integer, or an integer vector type. | |
3257 | |
3258 **Syntax**:: | |
3259 | |
3260 %vN = sdiv T V1, V2; <A> | |
3261 | |
3262 **Record**:: | |
3263 | |
3264 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 4> | |
3265 | |
3266 **Semantics**: | |
3267 | |
3268 The signed integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
3269 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type | |
3270 ``T``. ``T`` must be a integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is defined | |
3271 by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by the | |
3272 instruction. | |
3273 | |
3274 Signed values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer division are | |
3275 distinct operations. For unsigned integer division use the unsigned integer | |
3276 divide instruction (udiv). | |
3277 | |
3278 In the signed integer divide instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
3279 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Integer division by zero is guaranteed to | |
3280 trap. | |
3281 | |
3282 Note that overflow can happen with this instruction when dividing the maximum | |
3283 negative integer by ``-1``. The behavior for this case is currently undefined. | |
3284 | |
3285 **Constraints**:: | |
3286 | |
3287 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3288 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3289 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3290 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3291 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3292 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3293 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3294 | |
3295 **Updates**:: | |
3296 | |
3297 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3298 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3299 | |
3300 **Examples**:: | |
3301 | |
3302 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3303 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3304 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3305 | | %b0: | |
3306 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 4> | %v0 = sdiv i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3307 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 4> | %v1 = sdiv i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3308 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3309 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3310 | |
3311 Unsigned Integer Divide | |
3312 ----------------------- | |
3313 | |
3314 The unsigned integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
3315 arguments. Both the arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
3316 must be integer, or an integer vector type. | |
3317 | |
3318 **Syntax**:: | |
3319 | |
3320 %vN = udiv T V1, V2; <a> | |
3321 | |
3322 **Record**:: | |
3323 | |
3324 AA: <2, A1, A2, 3> | |
3325 | |
3326 **Semantics**: | |
3327 | |
3328 The unsigned integer divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
3329 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must be of type | |
3330 ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` is | |
3331 defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
3332 the instruction. | |
3333 | |
3334 Unsigned integer values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer | |
3335 division are distinct operations. For signed integer division use the signed | |
3336 integer divide instruction (sdiv). | |
3337 | |
3338 In the unsigned integer divide instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
3339 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Division by zero is guaranteed to trap. | |
3340 | |
3341 **Constraints**:: | |
3342 | |
3343 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3344 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3345 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3346 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3347 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3348 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3349 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3350 | |
3351 **Updates**:: | |
3352 | |
3353 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3354 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3355 | |
3356 **Examples**:: | |
3357 | |
3358 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3359 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3360 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3361 | | %b0: | |
3362 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 3> | %v0 = udiv i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3363 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 3> | %v1 = udiv i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3364 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3365 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3366 | |
3367 Signed Integer Remainder | |
3368 ------------------------ | |
3369 | |
3370 The signed integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
3371 of its two arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same | |
3372 type. That type must be integer, or an integer based vector type. | |
3373 | |
3374 **Syntax**:: | |
3375 | |
3376 %vN = srem T V1, V2; <A> | |
3377 | |
3378 **Record**:: | |
3379 | |
3380 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 6> | |
3381 | |
3382 **Semantics**: | |
3383 | |
3384 The signed integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
3385 of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must | |
3386 be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be a integer type, or an integer vector type. ``N`` | |
3387 is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
3388 the instruction. | |
3389 | |
3390 Signed values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer division are | |
3391 distinct operations. For unsigned integer division use the unsigned integer | |
3392 remainder instruction (urem). | |
3393 | |
3394 In the signed integer remainder instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector o f | |
3395 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Division by zero is guaranteed to trap. | |
3396 | |
3397 Note that overflow can happen with this instruction when dividing the maximum | |
3398 negative integer by ``-1``. The behavior for this case is currently undefined. | |
3399 | |
3400 **Constraints**:: | |
3401 | |
3402 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3403 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3404 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3405 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3406 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3407 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3408 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3409 | |
3410 **Updates**:: | |
3411 | |
3412 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3413 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3414 | |
3415 **Examples**:: | |
3416 | |
3417 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3418 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3419 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3420 | | %b0: | |
3421 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 6> | %v0 = srem i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3422 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 6> | %v1 = srem i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3423 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3424 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3425 | |
3426 Unsigned Integer Remainder Instruction | |
3427 -------------------------------------- | |
3428 | |
3429 The unsigned integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
3430 of its two arguments. Both the arguments and the result must be of the same | |
3431 type. The type must be integer, or an integer vector type. | |
3432 | |
3433 **Syntax**:: | |
3434 | |
3435 %vN = urem T V1, V2; <A> | |
3436 | |
3437 **Record**:: | |
3438 | |
3439 AA: <2, A1, A2, 5> | |
3440 | |
3441 **Semantics**: | |
3442 | |
3443 The unsigned integer remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
3444 of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN``, must | |
3445 be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer vector type. | |
3446 ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
3447 generated by the instruction. | |
3448 | |
3449 Unsigned values are assumed. Note that signed and unsigned integer division are | |
3450 distinct operations. For signed integer division use the remainder instruction | |
3451 (srem). | |
3452 | |
3453 In the unsigned integer remainder instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
3454 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. Division by zero is guaranteed to trap. | |
3455 | |
3456 **Constraints**:: | |
3457 | |
3458 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3459 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3460 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3461 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3462 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3463 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3464 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3465 | |
3466 **Updates**:: | |
3467 | |
3468 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3469 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3470 | |
3471 **Examples**:: | |
3472 | |
3473 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3474 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3475 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3476 | | %b0: | |
3477 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 5> | %v0 = urem i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3478 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 5> | %v1 = urem i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3479 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3480 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3481 | |
3482 Shift Left | |
3483 ---------- | |
3484 | |
3485 The (integer) shift left instruction returns the first operand, shifted to the | |
3486 left a specified number of bits with zero fill. The shifted value must be | |
3487 integer, or an integer vector type. | |
3488 | |
3489 **Syntax**:: | |
3490 | |
3491 %vN = shl T V1, V2; <A> | |
3492 | |
3493 **Record**:: | |
3494 | |
3495 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 7> | |
3496 | |
3497 **Semantics**: | |
3498 | |
3499 This instruction performs a shift left operation. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2`` | |
3500 and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer, or a | |
3501 vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the | |
3502 corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3503 | |
3504 ``V2`` is assumed to be unsigned. The least significant bits of the result will | |
3505 be filled with zero bits after the shift. If ``V2`` is (statically or | |
3506 dynamically) negative or equal to or larger than the number of bits in | |
3507 ``V1``, the result is undefined. If the arguments are vectors, each vector | |
3508 element of ``V1`` is shifted by the corresponding shift amount in ``V2``. | |
3509 | |
3510 In the shift left instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of integer type | |
3511 ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
3512 | |
3513 **Constraints**:: | |
3514 | |
3515 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3516 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3517 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3518 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3519 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3520 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3521 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3522 | |
3523 **Updates**:: | |
3524 | |
3525 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3526 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3527 | |
3528 **Examples**:: | |
3529 | |
3530 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3531 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3532 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3533 | | %b0: | |
3534 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 7> | %v0 = shl i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3535 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 7> | %v1 = shl i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3536 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3537 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3538 | |
3539 Logical Shift Right | |
3540 ------------------- | |
3541 | |
3542 The logical shift right instruction returns the first operand, shifted to the | |
3543 right a specified number of bits with zero fill. | |
3544 | |
3545 **Syntax**:: | |
3546 | |
3547 %vN = lshr T V1, V2; <A> | |
3548 | |
3549 **Record**:: | |
3550 | |
3551 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 8> | |
3552 | |
3553 **Semantics**: | |
3554 | |
3555 This instruction performs a logical shift right operation. Arguments ``V1`` and | |
3556 ``V2`` and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer, | |
3557 or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the | |
3558 corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3559 | |
3560 ``V2`` is assumed to be unsigned. The most significant bits of the result will b e | |
3561 filled with zero bits after the shift. If ``V2`` is (statically or dynamically) | |
3562 negative or equal to or larger than the number of bits in ``V1``, the result is | |
3563 undefined. If the arguments are vectors, each vector element of ``V1`` is shifte d | |
3564 by the corresponding shift amount in ``V2``. | |
3565 | |
3566 In the logical shift right instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
3567 integer type ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
3568 | |
3569 **Constraints**:: | |
3570 | |
3571 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3572 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3573 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3574 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3575 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3576 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3577 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3578 | |
3579 **Updates**:: | |
3580 | |
3581 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3582 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3583 | |
3584 **Examples**:: | |
3585 | |
3586 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3587 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3588 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3589 | | %b0: | |
3590 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 8> | %v0 = lshr i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3591 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 8> | %v1 = lshr i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3592 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3593 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3594 | |
3595 Arithmetic Shift Right | |
3596 ---------------------- | |
3597 | |
3598 The arithmetic shift right instruction returns the first operand, shifted to the | |
3599 right a specified number of bits with sign extension. | |
3600 | |
3601 **Syntax**:: | |
3602 | |
3603 %vN = ashr T V1, V2; <A> | |
3604 | |
3605 **Record**:: | |
3606 | |
3607 AA: <2, VV1, VVA2, 9> | |
3608 | |
3609 **Semantics**: | |
3610 | |
3611 This instruction performs an arithmetic shift right operation. Arguments ``V1`` | |
3612 and ``V2`` and and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an | |
3613 integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, | |
3614 defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3615 | |
3616 ``V2`` is assumed to be unsigned. The most significant bits of the result will b e | |
3617 filled with the sign bit of ``V1``. If ``V2`` is (statically or dynamically) | |
3618 negative or equal to or larger than the number of bits in ``V1``, the result is | |
3619 undefined. If the arguments are vectors, each vector element of ``V1`` is shifte d | |
3620 by the corresponding shift amount in ``V2``. | |
3621 | |
3622 In the arithmetic shift right instruction, integer type ``i1`` (and a vector of | |
3623 integral type ``i1``) is disallowed. | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
Hmm, the html version says "integrl" here, so I gu
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Will regenerate to verify.
| |
3624 | |
3625 **Constraints**:: | |
3626 | |
3627 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3628 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3629 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3630 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3631 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3632 UnderlyingType(T) != i1 & | |
3633 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3634 | |
3635 **Updates**:: | |
3636 | |
3637 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3638 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3639 | |
3640 **Examples**:: | |
3641 | |
3642 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3643 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3644 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3645 | | %b0: | |
3646 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 9> | %v0 = ashr i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3647 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 9> | %v1 = ashr i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3648 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3649 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3650 | |
3651 Logical And | |
3652 ----------- | |
3653 | |
3654 The *and* instruction returns the bitwise logical and of its two operands. | |
3655 | |
3656 **Syntax**:: | |
3657 | |
3658 %vN = and T V1, V2; <A> | |
3659 | |
3660 **Record**:: | |
3661 | |
3662 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 10> | |
3663 | |
3664 **Semantics**: | |
3665 | |
3666 This instruction performs a bitwise logical and of its arguments. Arguments | |
3667 ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be a n | |
3668 integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record position, | |
3669 defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. ``A`` is the | |
3670 (optional) abbreviation associated with the corresponding record. | |
3671 | |
3672 The truth table used for the *and* instruction is: | |
3673 | |
3674 ===== ===== ====== | |
3675 Arg 1 Arg 2 Result | |
3676 ===== ===== ====== | |
3677 0 0 0 | |
3678 0 1 0 | |
3679 1 0 0 | |
3680 1 1 1 | |
3681 ===== ===== ====== | |
3682 | |
3683 **Constraints**:: | |
3684 | |
3685 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3686 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3687 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3688 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3689 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T))) & | |
3690 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3691 | |
3692 **Updates**:: | |
3693 | |
3694 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3695 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3696 | |
3697 **Examples**:: | |
3698 | |
3699 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3700 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3701 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3702 | | %b0: | |
3703 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 10> | %v0 = and i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3704 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 10> | %v1 = and i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3705 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3706 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3707 | |
3708 Logical Or | |
3709 ---------- | |
3710 | |
3711 The *or* instruction returns the bitwise logical inclusive or of its | |
3712 two operands. | |
3713 | |
3714 **Syntax**:: | |
3715 | |
3716 %vN = or T V1, V2; <A> | |
3717 | |
3718 **Record**:: | |
3719 | |
3720 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 11> | |
3721 | |
3722 **Semantics**: | |
3723 | |
3724 This instruction performs a bitwise logical inclusive or of its arguments. | |
3725 Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` | |
3726 must be an integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record | |
3727 position, defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3728 | |
3729 The truth table used for the *or* instruction is: | |
3730 | |
3731 ===== ===== ====== | |
3732 Arg 1 Arg 2 Result | |
3733 ===== ===== ====== | |
3734 0 0 0 | |
3735 0 1 1 | |
3736 1 0 1 | |
3737 1 1 1 | |
3738 ===== ===== ====== | |
3739 | |
3740 **Constraints**:: | |
3741 | |
3742 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3743 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3744 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3745 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3746 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T))) & | |
3747 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3748 | |
3749 **Updates**:: | |
3750 | |
3751 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3752 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3753 | |
3754 **Examples**:: | |
3755 | |
3756 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3757 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3758 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3759 | | %b0: | |
3760 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 11> | %v0 = or i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3761 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 11> | %v1 = or i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3762 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3763 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3764 | |
3765 Logical Xor | |
3766 ----------- | |
3767 | |
3768 The *xor* instruction returns the bitwise logical exclusive or of its | |
3769 two operands. | |
3770 | |
3771 **Syntax**:: | |
3772 | |
3773 %vN = xor T V1, V2; <A> | |
3774 | |
3775 **Record**:: | |
3776 | |
3777 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 12> | |
3778 | |
3779 **Semantics**: | |
3780 | |
3781 This instruction performs a bitwise logical exclusive or of its arguments. | |
3782 Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` | |
3783 must be an integer, or a vector of integers. ``N`` is defined by the record | |
3784 position, defining the corresponding value generated by the instruction. | |
3785 | |
3786 The truth table used for the *or* instruction is: | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
xor
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:53
Done.
| |
3787 | |
3788 ===== ===== ====== | |
3789 Arg 1 Arg 2 Result | |
3790 ===== ===== ====== | |
3791 0 0 0 | |
3792 0 1 1 | |
3793 1 0 1 | |
3794 1 1 0 | |
3795 ===== ===== ====== | |
3796 | |
3797 **Constraints**:: | |
3798 | |
3799 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3800 A1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3801 A2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3802 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3803 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T))) & | |
3804 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3805 | |
3806 **Updates**:: | |
3807 | |
3808 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3809 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3810 | |
3811 **Examples**:: | |
3812 | |
3813 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
3814 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3815 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3816 | | %b0: | |
3817 106:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 12> | %v0 = xor i32 %p0, %p1; | |
3818 110:4| 3: <2, 1, 2, 12> | %v1 = xor i32 %v0, %p1; | |
3819 114:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v1; | |
3820 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3821 | |
3822 .. _link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions: | |
3823 | |
3824 Floating Point Binary Instructions | |
3825 ================================== | |
3826 | |
3827 Floating point binary instructions require two operands of the same type, | |
3828 execute an operation on them, and produce a value. The value may represent | |
3829 multiple values if the type is a vector type. The result value always has the | |
3830 same type as its operands. | |
3831 | |
3832 Floating Point Add | |
3833 ------------------ | |
3834 | |
3835 The floating point add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. Both | |
3836 arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type must be a floating | |
3837 point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
3838 | |
3839 **Syntax**:: | |
3840 | |
3841 %vN = fadd T V1, V2; <A> | |
3842 | |
3843 **Record**:: | |
3844 | |
3845 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 0> | |
3846 | |
3847 **Semantics**: | |
3848 | |
3849 The floating point add instruction returns the sum of its two arguments. | |
3850 Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2`` and the result ``%vN`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` | |
3851 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. ``N`` is | |
3852 defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value generated by | |
3853 the instruction. | |
3854 | |
3855 **Constraints**:: | |
3856 | |
3857 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3858 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3859 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3860 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3861 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3862 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3863 | |
3864 **Updates**:: | |
3865 | |
3866 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3867 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3868 | |
3869 **Examples**:: | |
3870 | |
3871 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
3872 | | float @f0(float %p0, float %p1) { | |
3873 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3874 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3875 | | %b0: | |
3876 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = fadd float %p0, %p1; | |
3877 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 0> | %v1 = fadd float %p0, %v0; | |
3878 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v1; | |
3879 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3880 | |
3881 Floating Point Subtract | |
3882 ----------------------- | |
3883 | |
3884 The floating point subtract instruction returns the difference of its two | |
3885 arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
3886 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
3887 | |
3888 **Syntax**:: | |
3889 | |
3890 %vN = fsub T V1, V2; <a> | |
3891 | |
3892 **Record**:: | |
3893 | |
3894 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 1> | |
3895 | |
3896 **Semantics**: | |
3897 | |
3898 The floating point subtract instruction returns the difference of its two | |
3899 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type | |
3900 ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
3901 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
3902 generated by the instruction. | |
3903 | |
3904 **Constraints**:: | |
3905 | |
3906 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3907 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3908 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3909 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3910 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3911 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3912 | |
3913 **Updates**:: | |
3914 | |
3915 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3916 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3917 | |
3918 **Examples**:: | |
3919 | |
3920 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
3921 | | float @f0(float %p0, float %p1) { | |
3922 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3923 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3924 | | %b0: | |
3925 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 1> | %v0 = fsub float %p0, %p1; | |
3926 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 1> | %v1 = fsub float %p0, %v0; | |
3927 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v1; | |
3928 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3929 | |
3930 Floating Point Multiply | |
3931 ----------------------- | |
3932 | |
3933 The floating point multiply instruction returns the product of its two | |
3934 arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
3935 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
3936 | |
3937 **Syntax**:: | |
3938 | |
3939 &vN = fmul T V1, V2; <A> | |
3940 | |
3941 **Record**:: | |
3942 | |
3943 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 2> | |
3944 | |
3945 **Semantics**: | |
3946 | |
3947 The floating point multiply instruction returns the product of its two | |
3948 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type | |
3949 ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
3950 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
3951 generated by the instruction. | |
3952 | |
3953 **Constraints**:: | |
3954 | |
3955 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
3956 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
3957 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
3958 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
3959 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
3960 N == NumValuedInsts | |
3961 | |
3962 **Updates**:: | |
3963 | |
3964 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
3965 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
3966 | |
3967 **Examples**:: | |
3968 | |
3969 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
3970 | | float @f0(float %p0, float %p1) { | |
3971 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
3972 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
3973 | | %b0: | |
3974 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 2> | %v0 = fmul float %p0, %p1; | |
3975 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 2> | %v1 = fmul float %p0, %v0; | |
3976 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v1; | |
3977 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
3978 | |
3979 Floating Point Divide | |
3980 --------------------- | |
3981 | |
3982 The floating point divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
3983 arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same type. That type | |
3984 must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point type. | |
3985 | |
3986 **Syntax**:: | |
3987 | |
3988 %vN = fdiv T V1, V2; <A> | |
3989 | |
3990 **Record**:: | |
3991 | |
3992 AA: <2, V1, V2, 4> | |
3993 | |
3994 **Semantics**: | |
3995 | |
3996 The floating point divide instruction returns the quotient of its two | |
3997 arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must be of type | |
3998 ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
3999 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
4000 generated by the instruction. | |
4001 | |
4002 **Constraints**:: | |
4003 | |
4004 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4005 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
4006 VV22 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
4007 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
4008 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
4009 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4010 | |
4011 **Updates**:: | |
4012 | |
4013 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4014 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
4015 | |
4016 **Examples**:: | |
4017 | |
4018 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
4019 | | double | |
4020 | | @f0(double %p0, double %p1) { | |
4021 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4022 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4023 | | %b0: | |
4024 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 4> | %v0 = fdiv double %p0, %p1; | |
4025 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 4> | %v1 = fdiv double %p0, %v0; | |
4026 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret double %v1; | |
4027 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4028 | |
4029 Floating Point Remainder | |
4030 ------------------------ | |
4031 | |
4032 The floating point remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
4033 of its two arguments. Both arguments and the result must be of the same | |
4034 type. That type must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
4035 type. | |
4036 | |
4037 **Syntax**:: | |
4038 | |
4039 %vN = frem T V1, V2; <A> | |
4040 | |
4041 **Record**:: | |
4042 | |
4043 AA: <2, VV1, VV2, 6> | |
4044 | |
4045 **Semantics**: | |
4046 | |
4047 The floating point remainder instruction returns the remainder of the quotient | |
4048 of its two arguments. Arguments ``V1`` and ``V2``, and the result ``%vN`` must b e of | |
4049 type ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point type, or a vector of a floating point | |
4050 type. ``N`` is defined by the record position, defining the corresponding value | |
4051 generated by the instruction. | |
4052 | |
4053 **Constraints**:: | |
4054 | |
4055 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4056 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
4057 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
4058 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
4059 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
4060 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4061 | |
4062 **Updates**:: | |
4063 | |
4064 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4065 TypeOf(%vN) = T | |
4066 | |
4067 **Examples**:: | |
4068 | |
4069 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
4070 | | double | |
4071 | | @f0(double %p0, double %p1) { | |
4072 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4073 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4074 | | %b0: | |
4075 102:4| 3: <2, 2, 1, 6> | %v0 = frem double %p0, %p1; | |
4076 106:4| 3: <2, 3, 1, 6> | %v1 = frem double %p0, %v0; | |
4077 110:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret double %v1; | |
4078 113:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4079 | |
4080 .. _link_for_memory_creation_and_access_instructions: | |
4081 | |
4082 Memory Creation and Access Instructions | |
4083 ======================================= | |
4084 | |
4085 A key design point of SSA-based representation is how it represents | |
4086 memory. In PNaCl bitcode files, no memory locations are in SSA | |
4087 form. This makes things very simple. | |
4088 | |
4089 .. _link_for_alloca_instruction: | |
4090 | |
4091 Alloca Instruction | |
4092 ------------------ | |
4093 | |
4094 The *alloca* instruction allocates memory on the stack frame of the | |
4095 currently executing function. This memory is automatically released | |
4096 when the function returns to its caller. | |
4097 | |
4098 **Syntax**:: | |
4099 | |
4100 %vN = alloca i8, i32 S, align V; <A> | |
4101 | |
4102 **Record**:: | |
4103 | |
4104 AA: <19, SS, VV> | |
4105 | |
4106 **Semantics**: | |
4107 | |
4108 The *alloca* instruction allocates memory on the stack frame of the currently | |
4109 executing function. The resulting value is a pointer to the allocated memory | |
4110 (i.e. of type i32). ``S`` is the number of bytes that are allocated on the | |
4111 stack. ``S`` must be of integer type i32. ``V`` is the alignment of the generate d | |
4112 stack address. | |
4113 | |
4114 Alignment must be a power of 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
4115 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
4116 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
4117 | |
4118 **Constraints**:: | |
4119 | |
4120 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4121 VV == Log2(V+1) & | |
4122 SS == RelativeIndex(S) & | |
4123 i32 == TypeOf(S) & | |
4124 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4125 | |
4126 **Updates**:: | |
4127 | |
4128 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4129 TypeOf(%vN) = i32; | |
4130 | |
4131 **Examples**:: | |
4132 | |
4133 112:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f1() { | |
4134 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4135 120:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4136 122:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
4137 132:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
4138 134:4| 3: <4, 4> | %c0 = i32 2; | |
4139 137:0| 3: <4, 8> | %c1 = i32 4; | |
4140 139:4| 3: <4, 16> | %c2 = i32 8; | |
4141 142:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4142 | | %b0: | |
4143 144:0| 3: <19, 3, 1> | %v0 = alloca i8, i32 %c0, align 1; | |
4144 147:2| 3: <19, 3, 3> | %v1 = alloca i8, i32 %c1, align 4; | |
4145 150:4| 3: <19, 3, 4> | %v2 = alloca i8, i32 %c2, align 8; | |
4146 153:6| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4147 155:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4148 | |
4149 Load Instruction | |
4150 ---------------- | |
4151 | |
4152 The *load* instruction is used to read from memory. | |
4153 | |
4154 **Syntax**:: | |
4155 | |
4156 %vN = load T* P, align V; <A> | |
4157 | |
4158 **Record**:: | |
4159 | |
4160 AA: <20, PP, VV, TT> | |
4161 | |
4162 **Semantics**: | |
4163 | |
4164 The load instruction is used to read from memory. ``P`` is the identifier of the | |
4165 memory address to read. The type of ``P`` must be an ``i32``. ``T`` is the type | |
4166 of value to read. ``V`` is the alignment of the memory address. | |
4167 | |
4168 Type ``T`` must be a vector, integer, or floating point type. Both ``float`` and | |
4169 ``double`` types are allowed for floating point types. All integer types except i1 | |
4170 are allowed. | |
4171 | |
4172 Alignment must be a power of 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
4173 alignment<link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
4174 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
4175 | |
4176 **Constraints**:: | |
4177 | |
4178 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4179 i32 == TypeOf(P) & | |
4180 PP == RelativeIndex(P) & | |
4181 VV == Log2(V+1) & | |
4182 %tTT == TypeID(T) & | |
4183 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4184 | |
4185 **Updates**:: | |
4186 | |
4187 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4188 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
4189 | |
4190 **Examples**:: | |
4191 | |
4192 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4193 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
4194 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
4195 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
4196 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
4197 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0> | @t3 = void (i32); | |
4198 61:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4199 ... | |
4200 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
4201 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4202 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4203 | | %b0: | |
4204 106:4| 3: <20, 1, 1, 0> | %v0 = load i32* %p0, align 1; | |
4205 110:4| 3: <20, 1, 4, 2> | %v1 = load double* %v0, align 8; | |
4206 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4207 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4208 | |
4209 Store Instruction | |
4210 ----------------- | |
4211 | |
4212 The *store* instruction is used to write to memory. | |
4213 | |
4214 **Syntax**:: | |
4215 | |
4216 store T S, T* P, align V; <A> | |
4217 | |
4218 **Record**:: | |
4219 | |
4220 AA: <24, PP, SS, VV> | |
4221 | |
4222 **Semantics**: | |
4223 | |
4224 The store instruction is used to write to memory. ``P`` is the identifier of the | |
4225 memory address to write to. The type of ``P`` must be an i32 integer. ``T`` is | |
4226 the type of value to store. ``S`` is the value to store, and must be of type | |
4227 ``T``. ``V`` is the alignment of the memory address. ``A`` is the (optional) | |
4228 abbreviation index associated with the record. | |
4229 | |
4230 Type ``T`` must be an integer or floating point type. Both ``float`` and | |
4231 ``double`` types are allowed for floating point types. All integer types except | |
4232 i1 are allowed. | |
4233 | |
4234 Alignment must be a power of 2. See :ref:`memory blocks and | |
4235 alignment<link_for_memory_Blocks_and_alignment_section>` for a more detailed | |
4236 discussion on how to define alignment. | |
4237 | |
4238 **Constraints**:: | |
4239 | |
4240 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4241 i32 == TypeOf(P) & | |
4242 PP == RelativeIndex(P) & | |
4243 VV == Log2(V+1) | |
4244 | |
4245 **Examples**:: | |
4246 | |
4247 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4248 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
4249 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
4250 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
4251 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
4252 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0, 0, 0, 2>| @t3 = void (i32, i32, i32, double); | |
4253 63:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4254 ... | |
4255 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
4256 | | void | |
4257 | | @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1, i32 %p2, | |
4258 | | double %p3) { | |
4259 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4260 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4261 | | %b0: | |
4262 106:4| 3: <24, 4, 3, 1> | store i32 %p1, i32* %p0, align 1; | |
4263 110:4| 3: <24, 2, 1, 4> | store double %p3, double* %p2, | |
4264 | | align 8; | |
4265 114:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4266 116:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4267 | |
4268 .. _link_for_conversion_instructions: | |
4269 | |
4270 Conversion Instructions | |
4271 ======================= | |
4272 | |
4273 Conversion instructions all take a single operand and a type. The value is | |
4274 converted to the corresponding type. | |
4275 | |
4276 Integer Truncating Instruction | |
4277 ------------------------------ | |
4278 | |
4279 The integer truncating instruction takes a value to truncate, and a type | |
4280 defining the truncated type. Both types must be integer types, or integer | |
4281 vectors with the same number of elements. The bit size of the value must be | |
4282 larger than the bit size of the destination type. Equal sized types are not | |
4283 allowed. | |
4284 | |
4285 **Syntax**:: | |
4286 | |
4287 %vN = trunc T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4288 | |
4289 **Record**:: | |
4290 | |
4291 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 0> | |
4292 | |
4293 **Semantics**: | |
4294 | |
4295 The integer truncating instruction takes a value ``V``, and truncates to type | |
4296 ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be integer types, or integer vectors with th e | |
4297 same number of elements. ``T1`` has to be wider than ``T2``. If the value doesn 't | |
4298 fit in in ``T2``, then the higher order bits are dropped. | |
4299 | |
4300 **Constraints**:: | |
4301 | |
4302 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4303 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4304 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4305 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
4306 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) > BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4307 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4308 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4309 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4310 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4311 | |
4312 **Updates**:: | |
4313 | |
4314 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4315 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4316 | |
4317 **Examples**:: | |
4318 | |
4319 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4320 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
4321 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
4322 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
4323 55:4| 3: <7, 16> | @t2 = i16; | |
4324 58:0| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0> | @t3 = void (i32); | |
4325 62:0| 3: <7, 8> | @t4 = i8; | |
4326 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4327 ... | |
4328 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
4329 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4330 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4331 | | %b0: | |
4332 110:4| 3: <3, 1, 2, 0> | %v0 = trunc i32 %p0 to i16; | |
4333 114:4| 3: <3, 1, 4, 0> | %v1 = trunc i16 %v0 to i8; | |
4334 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4335 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4336 | |
4337 Floating Point Truncating Instruction | |
4338 -------------------------------------- | |
4339 | |
4340 The floating point truncating instruction takes a value to truncate, and a type | |
4341 defining the truncated type. Both types must be floating point types, or | |
4342 floating point vectors with the same number of elements. The source must be | |
4343 ``double`` while the destination is ``float``. If the source is a vector, the | |
4344 destination must also be vector with the same size as the source. | |
4345 | |
4346 **Syntax**:: | |
4347 | |
4348 %vN = fptrunc T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4349 | |
4350 **Record**:: | |
4351 | |
4352 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 7> | |
4353 | |
4354 **Semantics** | |
4355 | |
4356 The floating point truncating instruction takes a value ``V``, and truncates to | |
4357 type ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be floating point types, or floating | |
4358 point vectors with the same number of elements. ``T1`` must be defined on | |
4359 ``double`` while ``T2`` is defined on ``float``. If the value can't fit within | |
4360 the destination type ``T2``, the results are undefined. | |
4361 | |
4362 **Constraints**:: | |
4363 | |
4364 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4365 double == UnderlyingType(T1) & | |
4366 float == UnderlyingType(T2) & | |
4367 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4368 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
4369 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) > BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4370 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4371 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4372 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4373 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4374 | |
4375 **Updates**:: | |
4376 | |
4377 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4378 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4379 | |
4380 **Examples**:: | |
4381 | |
4382 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4383 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
4384 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
4385 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
4386 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = float (double); | |
4387 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
4388 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
4389 ... | |
4390 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function float @f0(double %p0) { | |
4391 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4392 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4393 | | %b0: | |
4394 102:4| 3: <3, 1, 0, 7> | %v0 = fptrunc double %p0 to float; | |
4395 106:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret float %v0; | |
4396 109:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4397 | |
4398 | |
4399 Zero Extending Instruction | |
4400 -------------------------- | |
4401 | |
4402 The zero extending instruction takes a value to extend, and a type to extend it | |
4403 to. Both types must be integer types, or integer vectors with the same number | |
4404 of elements. The bit size of the source type must be smaller than the bit size | |
4405 of the destination type. Equal sized types are not allowed. | |
4406 | |
4407 **Syntax**:: | |
4408 | |
4409 %vN = zext T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4410 | |
4411 **Record**:: | |
4412 | |
4413 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 1> | |
4414 | |
4415 | |
4416 **Semantics**: | |
4417 | |
4418 The zero extending instruction takes a value ``V``, and expands it to type | |
4419 ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be integer types, or integer vectors with th e | |
4420 same number of elements. ``T2`` must be wider than ``T1``. | |
4421 | |
4422 The instruction fills the high order bits of the value with zero bits until it | |
4423 reaches the size of the destination type. When zero extending from i1, the | |
4424 result will always be either 0 or 1. | |
4425 | |
4426 **Constraints**:: | |
4427 | |
4428 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4429 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4430 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4431 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
4432 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) < BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4433 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4434 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4435 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4436 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4437 | |
4438 **Updates**:: | |
4439 | |
4440 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4441 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4442 | |
4443 **Examples**:: | |
4444 | |
4445 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4446 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
4447 50:4| 3: <7, 64> | @t0 = i64; | |
4448 53:6| 3: <7, 32> | @t1 = i32; | |
4449 57:0| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t2 = i64 (); | |
4450 60:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t3 = i8; | |
4451 62:6| 3: <2> | @t4 = void; | |
4452 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4453 ... | |
4454 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i64 @f0() { // BlockID = 12 | |
4455 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4456 110:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
4457 120:0| 3: <1, 3> | i8: | |
4458 122:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i8 1; | |
4459 125:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4460 | | %b0: | |
4461 128:0| 3: <3, 1, 1, 1> | %v0 = zext i8 %c0 to i32; | |
4462 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 0, 1> | %v1 = zext i32 %v0 to i64; | |
4463 136:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i64 %v1; | |
4464 138:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4465 | |
4466 Sign Extending Instruction | |
4467 -------------------------- | |
4468 | |
4469 The sign extending instruction takes a value to cast, and a type to extend it | |
4470 to. Both types must be integer types, or integral vectors with the same number | |
4471 of elements. The bit size of the source type must be smaller than the bit size | |
4472 of the destination type. Equal sized types are not allowed. | |
4473 | |
4474 **Syntax**:: | |
4475 | |
4476 %vN = sext T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4477 | |
4478 **Record**:: | |
4479 | |
4480 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 2> | |
4481 | |
4482 **Semantics**: | |
4483 | |
4484 The sign extending instruction takes a value ``V``, and expands it to type | |
4485 ``T2``. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be integer types, or integer vectors with th e | |
4486 same number of integers. ``T2`` has to be wider than ``T1``. | |
4487 | |
4488 When sign extending, the instruction fills the high order bits of the value with | |
4489 the (current) high order bit of the value. When sign extending from i1, the | |
4490 extension always results in -1 or 0. | |
4491 | |
4492 **Constraints**:: | |
4493 | |
4494 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4495 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4496 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4497 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
4498 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) < BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4499 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4500 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4501 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4502 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4503 | |
4504 **Updates**:: | |
4505 | |
4506 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4507 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4508 | |
4509 **Examples**:: | |
4510 | |
4511 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4512 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
4513 50:4| 3: <7, 64> | @t0 = i64; | |
4514 53:6| 3: <7, 32> | @t1 = i32; | |
4515 57:0| 3: <21, 0, 0> | @t2 = i64 (); | |
4516 60:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t3 = i8; | |
4517 62:6| 3: <2> | @t4 = void; | |
4518 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4519 ... | |
4520 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i64 @f0() { // BlockID = 12 | |
4521 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4522 110:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
4523 120:0| 3: <1, 3> | i8: | |
4524 122:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i8 -1; | |
4525 125:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4526 | | %b0: | |
4527 128:0| 3: <3, 1, 1, 2> | %v0 = sext i8 %c0 to i32; | |
4528 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 0, 2> | %v1 = sext i32 %v0 to i64; | |
4529 136:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i64 %v1; | |
4530 138:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4531 | |
4532 Floating Point Extending Instruction | |
4533 ------------------------------------ | |
4534 | |
4535 The floating point extending instruction takes a value to extend, and a type to | |
4536 extend it to. Both types must either be floating point types, or vectors of | |
4537 floating point types with the same number of elements. The source value must be | |
4538 ``float`` while the destination is ``double``. If the source is a vector, the | |
4539 destination must also be vector with the same size as the source. | |
4540 | |
4541 **Syntax**:: | |
4542 | |
4543 %vN = fpext T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4544 | |
4545 **Record**:: | |
4546 | |
4547 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 8> | |
4548 | |
4549 **Semantics**: | |
4550 | |
4551 The floating point extending instruction converts floating point values. | |
4552 ``V`` is the value to extend, and ``T2`` is the type to extend it | |
4553 to. Both ``T1`` and ``T2`` must be floating point types, or floating point | |
4554 vector types with the same number of floating point values. ``T1`` contains | |
4555 ``float`` while ``T2`` contains ``double``. | |
4556 | |
4557 **Constraints**:: | |
4558 | |
4559 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4560 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4561 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4562 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
4563 BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T1)) < BitSizeOf(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4564 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4565 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4566 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4567 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4568 | |
4569 **Updates**:: | |
4570 | |
4571 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4572 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4573 | |
4574 **Examples**:: | |
4575 | |
4576 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4577 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
4578 50:4| 3: <4> | @t0 = double; | |
4579 52:2| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
4580 54:0| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = double (float); | |
4581 58:0| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
4582 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
4583 ... | |
4584 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function double @f0(float %p0) { | |
4585 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4586 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4587 | | %b0: | |
4588 102:4| 3: <3, 1, 0, 8> | %v0 = fpext float %p0 to double; | |
4589 106:4| 3: <10, 1> | ret double %v0; | |
4590 109:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4591 | |
4592 Floating Point to Unsigned Integer Instruction | |
4593 ---------------------------------------------- | |
4594 | |
4595 The floating point to unsigned integer instruction converts floating point | |
4596 values to unsigned integers. | |
4597 | |
4598 **Syntax**:: | |
4599 | |
4600 %vN = fptoui T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4601 | |
4602 **Record**:: | |
4603 | |
4604 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 3> | |
4605 | |
4606 **Semantics**: | |
4607 | |
4608 The floating point to unsigned integer instruction converts floating point | |
4609 value(s) in ``V`` to its unsigned integer equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must | |
4610 be a floating point type, or a floating point vector type. ``T2`` must be an | |
4611 integer type, or an integer vector type. If either type is a vector type, they | |
4612 both must have the same number of elements. | |
4613 | |
4614 **Constraints**:: | |
4615 | |
4616 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4617 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4618 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4619 %tTT2 == TypeID(T2) & | |
4620 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4621 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4622 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4623 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4624 | |
4625 **Updates**:: | |
4626 | |
4627 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4628 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4629 | |
4630 **Examples**:: | |
4631 | |
4632 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4633 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
4634 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
4635 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
4636 54:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
4637 55:6| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (float, double); | |
4638 60:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t4 = i32; | |
4639 63:6| 3: <7, 16> | @t5 = i16; | |
4640 66:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4641 ... | |
4642 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
4643 | | void @f0(float %p0, double %p1) { | |
4644 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4645 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4646 | | %b0: | |
4647 110:4| 3: <3, 2, 4, 3> | %v0 = fptoui float %p0 to i32; | |
4648 114:4| 3: <3, 2, 5, 3> | %v1 = fptoui double %p1 to i16; | |
4649 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4650 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4651 | |
4652 Floating Point to Signed Integer Instruction | |
4653 -------------------------------------------- | |
4654 | |
4655 The floating point to signed integer instruction converts floating point | |
4656 values to signed integers. | |
4657 | |
4658 **Syntax**:: | |
4659 | |
4660 %vN = fptosi T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4661 | |
4662 **Record**:: | |
4663 | |
4664 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 4> | |
4665 | |
4666 **Semantics**: | |
4667 | |
4668 The floating point to signed integer instruction converts floating point value(s ) | |
4669 in ``V`` to its signed integer equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must be a | |
4670 floating point type, or a floating point vector type. ``T2`` must be an integer | |
4671 type, or an integer vector type. If either type is a vector type, they both must | |
4672 have the same number of elements. | |
4673 | |
4674 **Constraints**:: | |
4675 | |
4676 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4677 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4678 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4679 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
4680 UnderlyingCount(T1) = UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4681 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4682 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4683 N = NumValuedInsts | |
4684 | |
4685 **Updates**:: | |
4686 | |
4687 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4688 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4689 | |
4690 **Examples**:: | |
4691 | |
4692 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4693 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
4694 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
4695 52:2| 3: <4> | @t1 = double; | |
4696 54:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
4697 55:6| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (float, double); | |
4698 60:4| 3: <7, 8> | @t4 = i8; | |
4699 63:0| 3: <7, 16> | @t5 = i16; | |
4700 65:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4701 ... | |
4702 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
4703 | | void @f0(float %p0, double %p1) { | |
4704 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4705 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4706 | | %b0: | |
4707 110:4| 3: <3, 2, 4, 4> | %v0 = fptosi float %p0 to i8; | |
4708 114:4| 3: <3, 2, 5, 4> | %v1 = fptosi double %p1 to i16; | |
4709 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4710 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4711 | |
4712 Unsigned Integer to Floating Point Instruction | |
4713 ---------------------------------------------- | |
4714 | |
4715 The unsigned integer to floating point instruction converts unsigned integers to | |
4716 floating point values. | |
4717 | |
4718 **Syntax**:: | |
4719 | |
4720 %vN = uitofp T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4721 | |
4722 **Record**:: | |
4723 | |
4724 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 5> | |
4725 | |
4726 **Semantics**: | |
4727 | |
4728 The unsigned integer to floating point instruction converts unsigned integer(s) to | |
4729 its floating point equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must be an integer type, or | |
4730 a integer vector type. ``T2`` must be a floating point type, or a floating point | |
4731 vector type. If either type is a vector type, they both must have the | |
4732 same number of elements. | |
4733 | |
4734 **Constraints**:: | |
4735 | |
4736 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4737 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4738 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4739 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
4740 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4741 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4742 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4743 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4744 | |
4745 **Updates**:: | |
4746 | |
4747 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4748 TypeOf(%vN) == T2; | |
4749 | |
4750 **Examples**:: | |
4751 | |
4752 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4753 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
4754 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
4755 53:6| 3: <7, 64> | @t1 = i64; | |
4756 57:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
4757 58:6| 3: <3> | @t3 = float; | |
4758 60:4| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t4 = void (i32, i64); | |
4759 65:2| 3: <7, 1> | @t5 = i1; | |
4760 67:6| 3: <4> | @t6 = double; | |
4761 69:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4762 ... | |
4763 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %p1) { | |
4764 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4765 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4766 114:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
4767 124:0| 3: <1, 5> | i1: | |
4768 126:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
4769 129:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4770 | | %b0: | |
4771 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 6, 5> | %v0 = uitofp i1 %c0 to double; | |
4772 136:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 5> | %v1 = uitofp i32 %p0 to float; | |
4773 140:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 5> | %v2 = uitofp i64 %p1 to float; | |
4774 144:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4775 145:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
4776 | |
4777 Signed Integer to Floating Point Instruction | |
4778 -------------------------------------------- | |
4779 | |
4780 The signed integer to floating point instruction converts signed integers to | |
4781 floating point values. | |
4782 | |
4783 **Syntax**:: | |
4784 | |
4785 %vN = sitofp T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4786 | |
4787 **Record**:: | |
4788 | |
4789 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 6> | |
4790 | |
4791 **Semantics**: | |
4792 | |
4793 The signed integer to floating point instruction converts signed integer(s) to i ts | |
4794 floating point equivalent of type ``T2``. ``T1`` must be an integer type, or a | |
4795 integer vector type. ``T2`` must be a floating point type, or a floating point | |
4796 vector type. If either type is a vector type, they both must have the | |
4797 same number of elements. | |
4798 | |
4799 **Constraints**:: | |
4800 | |
4801 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4802 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4803 VV == RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4804 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
4805 UnderlyingCount(T1) == UnderlyingCount(T2) & | |
4806 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T1)) & | |
4807 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T2)) & | |
4808 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4809 | |
4810 **Updates**:: | |
4811 | |
4812 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4813 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4814 | |
4815 **Examples**:: | |
4816 | |
4817 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4818 48:0| 3: <1, 7> | count 7; | |
4819 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
4820 53:6| 3: <7, 64> | @t1 = i64; | |
4821 57:0| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
4822 58:6| 3: <3> | @t3 = float; | |
4823 60:4| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t4 = void (i32, i64); | |
4824 65:2| 3: <7, 8> | @t5 = i8; | |
4825 67:6| 3: <4> | @t6 = double; | |
4826 69:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4827 ... | |
4828 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %p1) { | |
4829 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4830 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4831 114:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
4832 124:0| 3: <1, 5> | i8: | |
4833 126:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i8 -1; | |
4834 129:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4835 | | %b0: | |
4836 132:0| 3: <3, 1, 6, 6> | %v0 = sitofp i8 %c0 to double; | |
4837 136:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 6> | %v1 = sitofp i32 %p0 to float; | |
4838 140:0| 3: <3, 4, 3, 6> | %v2 = sitofp i64 %p1 to float; | |
4839 144:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4840 145:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
4841 | |
4842 Bitcast Instruction | |
4843 ------------------- | |
4844 | |
4845 The bitcast instruction converts the type of the value without changing the bit | |
4846 contents of the value. The bit size of the type of the value must be the same as | |
4847 the bit size of the cast type. | |
4848 | |
4849 **Syntax**:: | |
4850 | |
4851 %vN = bitcast T1 V to T2; <A> | |
4852 | |
4853 **Record**:: | |
4854 | |
4855 AA: <3, VV, TT2, 11> | |
4856 | |
4857 **Semantics**: | |
4858 | |
4859 The bitcast instruction converts the type of value ``V`` to type ``T2``. ``T1`` | |
4860 and ``T2`` must be primitive types or vectors, and define the same number of | |
4861 bits. | |
4862 | |
4863 **Constraints**:: | |
4864 | |
4865 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4866 TypeOf(V) == T1 & | |
4867 VV = RelativeIndex(V) & | |
4868 %tTT2 = TypeID(T2) & | |
4869 BitSizeOf(T1) == BitSizeOf(T2) & | |
4870 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4871 | |
4872 **Updates**:: | |
4873 | |
4874 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4875 TypeOf(%vN) = T2; | |
4876 | |
4877 **Examples**:: | |
4878 | |
4879 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4880 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
4881 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
4882 52:2| 3: <7, 64> | @t1 = i64; | |
4883 55:4| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
4884 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 2, 0, 1> | @t3 = void (float, i64); | |
4885 62:0| 3: <7, 32> | @t4 = i32; | |
4886 65:2| 3: <4> | @t5 = double; | |
4887 67:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
4888 ... | |
4889 100:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(float %p0, i64 %p1) | |
4890 | | { // BlockID = 12 | |
4891 108:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4892 | | %b0: | |
4893 110:4| 3: <3, 2, 4, 11> | %v0 = bitcast float %p0 to i32; | |
4894 114:4| 3: <3, 2, 5, 11> | %v1 = bitcast i64 %p1 to double; | |
4895 118:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4896 120:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4897 | |
4898 .. _link_for_compare_instructions: | |
4899 | |
4900 Comparison Instructions | |
4901 ======================= | |
4902 | |
4903 The comparison instructions compares values returns a boolean (i1) result for | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/18 02:24:42
... compare ...
... and return ...
Karl
2014/11/19 20:28:52
Done.
| |
4904 each pair of compared values. There are different comparison operations for | |
4905 integer and floating point values. | |
4906 | |
4907 | |
4908 Integer Comparison Instructions | |
4909 ------------------------------- | |
4910 | |
4911 The integer comparison instruction compares integer values and returns a | |
4912 boolean (i1) result for each pair of compared values. | |
4913 | |
4914 **Syntax**:: | |
4915 | |
4916 %vN = icmp C T V1, V2; <A> | |
4917 | |
4918 **Record**:: | |
4919 | |
4920 AA: <9, VV1, VV2, CC> | |
4921 | |
4922 **Semantics**: | |
4923 | |
4924 The integer comparison instruction compares integer values and returns a boolean | |
4925 (i1) result for each pair of compared values in ``V1`` and ``V2``. ``V1`` and | |
4926 ``V2`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be an integer type, or an integer | |
4927 vector type. Condition code ``C`` is the condition applied to all elements in | |
4928 ``V1`` and ``V2``. Each comparison always yields an i1. If ``T`` is a primitive | |
4929 type, the resulting type is i1. If ``T`` is a vector, then the resulting type is | |
4930 a vector of i1 with the same size as ``T``. | |
4931 | |
4932 Legal test conditions are: | |
4933 | |
4934 === == ============================== | |
4935 C CC Operator | |
4936 === == ============================== | |
4937 eq 32 equal | |
4938 ne 33 not equal | |
4939 ugt 34 unsigned greater than | |
4940 uge 35 unsigned greater than or equal | |
4941 ult 36 unsigned less than | |
4942 ule 37 unsigned less than or equal | |
4943 sgt 38 signed greater than | |
4944 sge 39 signed greater than or equal | |
4945 slt 40 signed less than | |
4946 sle 41 signed less than or equal | |
4947 === == ============================== | |
4948 | |
4949 **Constraints**:: | |
4950 | |
4951 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
4952 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T) & | |
4953 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
4954 N == NumValuedInsts | |
4955 | |
4956 **Updates**:: | |
4957 | |
4958 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
4959 if IsVector(T) then | |
4960 TypeOf(%vN) = <UnderlyingCount(T), i1> | |
4961 else | |
4962 TypeOf(%vN) = i1 | |
4963 endif | |
4964 | |
4965 **Examples**:: | |
4966 | |
4967 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
4968 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
4969 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
4970 53:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
4971 56:2| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
4972 58:0| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t3 = void (); | |
4973 61:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4974 ... | |
4975 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
4976 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
4977 116:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
4978 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
4979 128:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
4980 130:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c0 = i32 0; | |
4981 133:0| 3: <4, 2> | %c1 = i32 1; | |
4982 135:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
4983 | | %b0: | |
4984 136:0| 3: <28, 2, 1, 32> | %v0 = icmp eq i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4985 140:6| 3: <28, 3, 2, 33> | %v1 = icmp ne i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4986 145:4| 3: <28, 4, 3, 34> | %v2 = icmp ugt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4987 150:2| 3: <28, 5, 4, 36> | %v3 = icmp ult i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4988 155:0| 3: <28, 6, 5, 37> | %v4 = icmp ule i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4989 159:6| 3: <28, 7, 6, 38> | %v5 = icmp sgt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4990 164:4| 3: <28, 8, 7, 38> | %v6 = icmp sgt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4991 169:2| 3: <28, 9, 8, 39> | %v7 = icmp sge i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4992 174:0| 3: <28, 10, 9, 40> | %v8 = icmp slt i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4993 178:6| 3: <28, 11, 10, 41> | %v9 = icmp sle i32 %c0, %c1; | |
4994 183:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
4995 185:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
4996 | |
4997 | |
4998 Floating Point Comparison Instructions | |
4999 -------------------------------------- | |
5000 | |
5001 The floating point comparison instruction compares floating point values and | |
5002 returns a boolean (i1) result for each pair of compared values. | |
5003 | |
5004 **Syntax**:: | |
5005 | |
5006 %vN = fcmp C T V1, V2; <A> | |
5007 | |
5008 **Record**:: | |
5009 | |
5010 AA: <9, VV1, VV2, CC> | |
5011 | |
5012 **Semantics**: | |
5013 | |
5014 The floating point comparison instruction compares floating point values and | |
5015 returns a boolean (i1) result for each pair of compared values in ``V1`` and | |
5016 ``V2``. ``V1`` and ``V2`` must be of type ``T``. ``T`` must be a floating point | |
5017 type, or a floating point vector type. Condition code ``C`` is the condition | |
5018 applied to all elements in ``V1`` and ``V2``. Each comparison always yields an | |
5019 i1. If ``T`` is a primitive type, the resulting type is i1. If ``T`` is a | |
5020 vector, then the resulting type is a vector of i1 with the same size as ``T``. | |
5021 | |
5022 Legal test conditions are: | |
5023 | |
5024 ===== == ================================== | |
5025 C CC Operator | |
5026 ===== == ================================== | |
5027 false 0 Always false | |
5028 oeq 1 Ordered and equal | |
5029 ogt 2 Ordered and greater than | |
5030 oge 3 Ordered and greater than or equal | |
5031 olt 4 Ordered and less than | |
5032 ole 5 Ordered and less than or equal | |
5033 one 6 Ordered and not equal | |
5034 ord 7 Ordered (no nans) | |
Jim Stichnoth
2014/11/17 18:54:56
For these two lines, maybe write "NaNs" instead of
Karl
2014/11/17 20:17:28
Done.
| |
5035 uno 8 Unordered (either nans) | |
5036 ueq 9 Unordered or equal | |
5037 ugt 10 Unordered or greater than | |
5038 uge 11 Unordered or greater than or equal | |
5039 ult 12 Unordered or less than | |
5040 ule 13 Unordered or less than or equal | |
5041 une 14 Unordered or not equal | |
5042 true 15 Always true | |
5043 ===== == ================================== | |
5044 | |
5045 **Constraints**:: | |
5046 | |
5047 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5048 IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T) & | |
5049 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
5050 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5051 | |
5052 **Updates**:: | |
5053 | |
5054 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5055 if IsVector(T) then | |
5056 TypeOf(%vN) = <UnderlyingCount(T), i1> | |
5057 else | |
5058 TypeOf(%vN) = i1 | |
5059 endif | |
5060 | |
5061 **Examples**:: | |
5062 | |
5063 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
5064 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
5065 50:4| 3: <3> | @t0 = float; | |
5066 52:2| 3: <7, 1> | @t1 = i1; | |
5067 54:6| 3: <2> | @t2 = void; | |
5068 56:4| 3: <21, 0, 2> | @t3 = void (); | |
5069 59:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
5070 ... | |
5071 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
5072 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5073 116:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5074 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5075 128:0| 3: <1, 0> | float: | |
5076 130:4| 3: <6, 0> | %c0 = float 0; | |
5077 133:0| 3: <6, 1065353216> | %c1 = float 1; | |
5078 139:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5079 | | %b0: | |
5080 140:0| 3: <28, 2, 1, 0> | %v0 = fcmp false float %c0, %c1; | |
5081 144:0| 3: <28, 3, 2, 1> | %v1 = fcmp oeq float %c0, %c1; | |
5082 148:0| 3: <28, 4, 3, 2> | %v2 = fcmp ogt float %c0, %c1; | |
5083 152:0| 3: <28, 5, 4, 3> | %v3 = fcmp oge float %c0, %c1; | |
5084 156:0| 3: <28, 6, 5, 4> | %v4 = fcmp olt float %c0, %c1; | |
5085 160:0| 3: <28, 7, 6, 5> | %v5 = fcmp ole float %c0, %c1; | |
5086 164:0| 3: <28, 8, 7, 6> | %v6 = fcmp one float %c0, %c1; | |
5087 168:0| 3: <28, 9, 8, 7> | %v7 = fcmp ord float %c0, %c1; | |
5088 172:0| 3: <28, 10, 9, 9> | %v8 = fcmp ueq float %c0, %c1; | |
5089 176:0| 3: <28, 11, 10, 10> | %v9 = fcmp ugt float %c0, %c1; | |
5090 180:0| 3: <28, 12, 11, 11> | %v10 = fcmp uge float %c0, %c1; | |
5091 184:0| 3: <28, 13, 12, 12> | %v11 = fcmp ult float %c0, %c1; | |
5092 188:0| 3: <28, 14, 13, 13> | %v12 = fcmp ule float %c0, %c1; | |
5093 192:0| 3: <28, 15, 14, 14> | %v13 = fcmp une float %c0, %c1; | |
5094 196:0| 3: <28, 16, 15, 8> | %v14 = fcmp uno float %c0, %c1; | |
5095 200:0| 3: <28, 17, 16, 15> | %v15 = fcmp true float %c0, %c1; | |
5096 204:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5097 205:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
5098 208:0|0: <65534> |} | |
5099 | |
5100 .. _link_for_vector_instructions: | |
5101 | |
5102 Vector Instructions | |
5103 =================== | |
5104 | |
5105 PNaClAsm supports several instructions that process vectors. This includes the | |
5106 :ref:`integer<link_for_integer_binary_instructions>` and :ref:`floating | |
5107 point<link_for_floating_point_binary_instructions>` binary instructions as well | |
5108 as :ref:`compare<link_for_compare_instructions>` instructions. These | |
5109 instructions work with vectors and generate resulting (new) vectors. This | |
5110 section introduces the instructions to construct vectors and extract results. | |
5111 | |
5112 .. _link_for_insert_element_instruction_section: | |
5113 | |
5114 Insert Element Instruction | |
5115 -------------------------- | |
5116 | |
5117 The *insert element* instruction inserts a scalar value into a vector at a | |
5118 specified index. The *insert element* instruction takes an existing vector and | |
5119 puts a scalar value in one of the elements of the vector. | |
5120 | |
5121 The *insert element* instruction can be used to construct a vector, one element | |
5122 at a time. At first glance, it may appear that one can't construct a vector, | |
5123 since the *insert element* instruction needs a vector to insert elements into. | |
5124 | |
5125 The key to understanding vector construction is understand that one can create | |
5126 an :ref:`undefined<link_for_undefined_literal>` vector literal. Using that | |
5127 constant as a starting point, one can built up the wanted vector by a sequence | |
5128 of *insert element* instructions. | |
5129 | |
5130 **Syntax**:: | |
5131 | |
5132 %vN = insertelement TV V, TE E, i32 I; <A> | |
5133 | |
5134 **Record**:: | |
5135 | |
5136 AA: <7, VV, EE, II> | |
5137 | |
5138 **Semantics**: | |
5139 | |
5140 The *insert element* instruction inserts scalar value ``E`` into index ``I`` of | |
5141 vector ``V``. ``%vN`` holds the updated vector. Type ``TV`` is the type of | |
5142 vector. It is also the type of updated vector ``%vN``. Type ``TE`` is the type | |
5143 of scalar value ``E`` and must be the element type of vector ``V``. ``I`` must | |
5144 be an :ref:`i32 literal<link_for_integer_literal>`. | |
5145 | |
5146 If ``I`` exceeds the length of ``V``, the result is undefined. | |
5147 | |
5148 **Constraints**:: | |
5149 | |
5150 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5151 IsVector(TV) & | |
5152 TypeOf(V) == TV & | |
5153 UnderlyingType(TV) == TE & | |
5154 TypeOf(I) == i32 & | |
5155 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5156 | |
5157 **Updates**:: | |
5158 | |
5159 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5160 TypeOf(%vN) = TV; | |
5161 | |
5162 **Examples**:: | |
5163 | |
5164 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
5165 48:0| 3: <1, 5> | count 5; | |
5166 50:4| 3: <7, 1> | @t0 = i1; | |
5167 53:0| 3: <12, 4, 0> | @t1 = <4 x i1>; | |
5168 56:2| 3: <7, 32> | @t2 = i32; | |
5169 59:4| 3: <2> | @t3 = void; | |
5170 61:2| 3: <21, 0, 3> | @t4 = void (); | |
5171 64:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
5172 ... | |
5173 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
5174 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5175 124:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5176 126:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5177 136:0| 3: <1, 0> | i1: | |
5178 138:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c0 = i1 0; | |
5179 141:0| 3: <4, 3> | %c1 = i1 1; | |
5180 143:4| 3: <1, 1> | <4 x i1>: | |
5181 146:0| 3: <3> | %c2 = <4 x i1> undef; | |
5182 147:6| 3: <1, 2> | i32: | |
5183 150:2| 3: <4, 0> | %c3 = i32 0; | |
5184 152:6| 3: <4, 2> | %c4 = i32 1; | |
5185 155:2| 3: <4, 4> | %c5 = i32 2; | |
5186 157:6| 3: <4, 6> | %c6 = i32 3; | |
5187 160:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5188 | | %b0: | |
5189 164:0| 3: <7, 5, 7, 4> | %v0 = insertelement <4 x i1> %c2, | |
5190 | | i1 %c0, i32 %c3; | |
5191 168:0| 3: <7, 1, 7, 4> | %v1 = insertelement <4 x i1> %v0, | |
5192 | | i1 %c1, i32 %c4; | |
5193 172:0| 3: <7, 1, 9, 4> | %v2 = insertelement <4 x i1> %v1, | |
5194 | | i1 %c0, i32 %c5; | |
5195 176:0| 3: <7, 1, 9, 4> | %v3 = insertelement <4 x i1> %v2, | |
5196 | | i1 %c1, i32 %c6; | |
5197 180:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5198 181:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
5199 | |
5200 Extract Element Instruction | |
5201 --------------------------- | |
5202 | |
5203 The *extract element* instruction extracts a single scalar value from a vector | |
5204 at a specified index. | |
5205 | |
5206 **Syntax**:: | |
5207 | |
5208 %vN = extractelement TV V, i32 I; <A> | |
5209 | |
5210 **Record**:: | |
5211 | |
5212 AA: <6, VV, II> | |
5213 | |
5214 **Semantics**: | |
5215 | |
5216 The *extract element* instruction extracts the scalar value at index ``I`` from | |
5217 vector ``V``. The extracted value is assigned to ``%vN``. Type ``TV`` is the | |
5218 type of vector ``V``. ``I`` must be an :ref:`i32 | |
5219 literal<link_for_integer_literal>`. The type of ``vN`` must be the element type | |
5220 of vector ``V``. | |
5221 | |
5222 If ``I`` exceeds the length of ``V``, the result is undefined. | |
5223 | |
5224 **Constraints**:: | |
5225 | |
5226 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5227 IsVector(TV) & | |
5228 TypeOf(V) == TV & | |
5229 TypeOf(I) == i32 & | |
5230 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5231 | |
5232 **Updates**:: | |
5233 | |
5234 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5235 TypeOf(%vN) = UnderlyingType(TV); | |
5236 | |
5237 **Examples**:: | |
5238 | |
5239 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(<4 x i32> %p0) { | |
5240 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5241 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5242 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5243 116:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
5244 118:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c0 = i32 0; | |
5245 121:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5246 | | %b0: | |
5247 124:0| 3: <6, 2, 1> | %v0 = | |
5248 | | extractelement <4 x i32> %p0, | |
5249 | | i32 %c0; | |
5250 127:2| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5251 129:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5252 | |
5253 .. _link_for_other_pnaclasm_instructions: | |
5254 | |
5255 Other Instructions | |
5256 ================== | |
5257 | |
5258 This section defines miscellaneous instructions which defy better | |
5259 classification. | |
5260 | |
5261 .. _link_for_forward_type_declaration_section: | |
5262 | |
5263 Forward Type Declaration | |
5264 ------------------------ | |
5265 | |
5266 The forward type declaration exists to deal with the fact that all instruction | |
5267 values must have a type associated with them before they are used. For some | |
5268 simple functions one can easily topologically sort instructions so that | |
5269 instruction values are defined before they are used. However, if the | |
5270 implementation contains loops, the loop induced values can't be defined before | |
5271 they are used. | |
5272 | |
5273 The solution is to forward declare the type of an instruction value. One could | |
5274 forward declare the types of all instructions at the beginning of the function | |
5275 block. However, this would make the corresponding file size considerably | |
5276 larger. Rather, one should only generate these forward type declarations | |
5277 sparingly and only when needed. | |
5278 | |
5279 **Syntax**:: | |
5280 | |
5281 declare T %vN; <A> | |
5282 | |
5283 **Record**:: | |
5284 | |
5285 AA: <43, N, TT> | |
5286 | |
5287 **Semantics**: | |
5288 | |
5289 The forward declare type declaration defines the type to be associated with a | |
5290 (not yet defined) instruction value ``%vN``. ``T`` is the type of the value | |
5291 generated by the ``Nth`` value generating instruction in the function block. | |
5292 | |
5293 Note: It is an error to define the type of ``%vN`` with a different type than | |
5294 will be generated by the ``Nth`` value generating instruction in the function | |
5295 block. | |
5296 | |
5297 Also note that this construct is a declaration and not considered an | |
5298 instruction, even though it appears in the list of instruction records. Hence, | |
5299 they may appear before and between :ref:`phi<link_for_phi_instruction_section>` | |
5300 instructions in a basic block. | |
5301 | |
5302 **Constraints**:: | |
5303 | |
5304 AA = AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5305 TT = TypeID(T) | |
5306 | |
5307 **Updates**:: | |
5308 | |
5309 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
5310 | |
5311 **Examples**:: | |
5312 | |
5313 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
5314 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
5315 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
5316 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
5317 55:4| 3: <7, 1> | @t2 = i1; | |
5318 58:0| 3: <21, 0, 1, 0> | @t3 = void (i32); | |
5319 62:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5320 ... | |
5321 108:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
5322 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5323 116:0| 3: <1, 7> | blocks 7; | |
5324 118:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5325 128:0| 3: <1, 2> | i1: | |
5326 130:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
5327 133:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5328 | | %b0: | |
5329 136:0| 3: <11, 4> | br label %b4; | |
5330 | | %b1: | |
5331 138:4| 3: <43, 6, 0> | declare i32 %v3; | |
5332 142:4| 3: <2, 2, 4294967293, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %p0, %v3; | |
5333 151:0| 3: <11, 6> | br label %b6; | |
5334 | | %b2: | |
5335 153:4| 3: <43, 7, 0> | declare i32 %v4; | |
5336 157:4| 3: <2, 3, 4294967293, 0> | %v1 = add i32 %p0, %v4; | |
5337 166:0| 3: <11, 6> | br label %b6; | |
5338 | | %b3: | |
5339 168:4| 3: <2, 4, 4294967295, 0> | %v2 = add i32 %p0, %v3; | |
5340 177:0| 3: <11, 6> | br label %b6; | |
5341 | | %b4: | |
5342 179:4| 3: <2, 5, 5, 0> | %v3 = add i32 %p0, %p0; | |
5343 183:4| 3: <11, 1, 5, 5> | br i1 %c0, label %b1, label %b5; | |
5344 | | %b5: | |
5345 187:4| 3: <2, 1, 6, 0> | %v4 = add i32 %v3, %p0; | |
5346 191:4| 3: <11, 2, 3, 6> | br i1 %c0, label %b2, label %b3; | |
5347 | | %b6: | |
5348 195:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5349 197:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5350 | |
5351 .. _link_for_phi_instruction_section: | |
5352 | |
5353 Phi Instruction | |
5354 --------------- | |
5355 | |
5356 The *phi* instruction is used to implement phi nodes in the SSA graph | |
5357 representing the function. Phi instructions can only appear at the beginning of | |
5358 a basic block. There must be no non-phi instructions (other than forward type | |
5359 declarations) between the start of the basic block and the *phi* instruction. | |
5360 | |
5361 To clarify the origin of each incoming value, the incoming value is associated | |
5362 with the incoming edge from the corresponding predecessor block that the | |
5363 incoming value comes from. | |
5364 | |
5365 **Syntax**:: | |
5366 | |
5367 %vN = phi T [V1, %bB1], ... , [VM, %bBM]; <A> | |
5368 | |
5369 **Record**:: | |
5370 | |
5371 AA: <16, TT, VV1, B1, ..., VVM, BM> | |
5372 | |
5373 **Semantics**: | |
5374 | |
5375 The phi instruction is used to implement phi nodes in the SSA graph representing | |
5376 the function. ``%vN`` is the resulting value of the corresponding phi node. ``T` ` is | |
5377 the type of the phi node. Values ``V1`` through ``VM`` are the reaching definiti ons | |
5378 for the phi node while ``%bB1`` through ``%bBM`` are the corresponding predecess or | |
5379 blocks. Each ``VI`` reaches via the incoming predecessor edge from block ``%bBI `` | |
5380 (for 1 <= I <= M). Type ``T`` must be the type associated with each ``VI``. | |
5381 | |
5382 **Constraints**:: | |
5383 | |
5384 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5385 M > 1 & | |
5386 TT == TypeID(T) & | |
5387 T = TypeOf(VI) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5388 BI < ExpectedBasicBlocks for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5389 VVI = SignRotate(RelativeIndex(VI)) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5390 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5391 | |
5392 **Updates**:: | |
5393 | |
5394 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5395 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
5396 | |
5397 **Examples**:: | |
5398 | |
5399 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
5400 48:0| 3: <1, 4> | count 4; | |
5401 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
5402 53:6| 3: <2> | @t1 = void; | |
5403 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 1> | @t2 = void (); | |
5404 58:6| 3: <7, 1> | @t3 = i1; | |
5405 61:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5406 ... | |
5407 112:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0() { | |
5408 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5409 120:0| 3: <1, 4> | blocks 4; | |
5410 122:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5411 132:0| 3: <1, 0> | i32: | |
5412 134:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
5413 137:0| 3: <1, 3> | i1: | |
5414 139:4| 3: <4, 0> | %c1 = i1 0; | |
5415 142:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5416 | | %b0: | |
5417 144:0| 3: <11, 1, 2, 1> | br i1 %c1, label %b1, label %b2; | |
5418 | | %b1: | |
5419 148:0| 3: <2, 2, 2, 0> | %v0 = add i32 %c0, %c0; | |
5420 152:0| 3: <2, 3, 3, 1> | %v1 = sub i32 %c0, %c0; | |
5421 156:0| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
5422 | | %b2: | |
5423 158:4| 3: <2, 4, 4, 2> | %v2 = mul i32 %c0, %c0; | |
5424 162:4| 3: <2, 5, 5, 3> | %v3 = udiv i32 %c0, %c0; | |
5425 166:4| 3: <11, 3> | br label %b3; | |
5426 | | %b3: | |
5427 169:0| 3: <16, 0, 8, 1, 4, 2> | %v4 = phi i32 [%v0, %b1], | |
5428 | | [%v2, %b2]; | |
5429 174:4| 3: <16, 0, 8, 1, 4, 2> | %v5 = phi i32 [%v1, %b1], | |
5430 | | [%v3, %b2]; | |
5431 180:0| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5432 181:6| 0: <65534> | } | |
5433 | |
5434 Select Instruction | |
5435 ------------------ | |
5436 | |
5437 The *select* instruction is used to choose between pairs of values, based on a | |
5438 condition, without PNaClAsm-level branching. | |
5439 | |
5440 **Syntax**:: | |
5441 | |
5442 %vN = select CT C, T V1, T V2; <A> | |
5443 | |
5444 **Record**:: | |
5445 | |
5446 AA: <29, VV1, VV2, CC> | |
5447 | |
5448 **Semantics**: | |
5449 | |
5450 The *select* instruction chooses pairs of values ``V1`` and ``V2``, based on | |
5451 condition value ``C``. The type ``CT`` of value ``C`` must either be an i1, or a | |
5452 vector of type i1. The type of values ``V1`` and ``V2`` must be of type ``T``. T ype | |
5453 ``T`` must either be a primitive type, or a vector of a primitive type. | |
5454 | |
5455 Both ``CT`` and ``T`` must be primitive types, or both must be vector types of t he | |
5456 same size. When the contents of ``C`` is 1, the corresponding value from ``V1`` will | |
5457 be chosen. Otherwise the corresponding value from ``V2`` will be chosen. | |
5458 | |
5459 **Constraints**:: | |
5460 | |
5461 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5462 CC == RelativeIndex(C) & | |
5463 VV1 == RelativeIndex(V1) & | |
5464 VV2 == RelativeIndex(V2) & | |
5465 T == TypeOf(V1) == TypeOf(V2) & | |
5466 UnderlyingType(CT) == i1 & | |
5467 IsInteger(UnderlyingType(T)) or IsFloat(UnderlyingType(T)) & | |
5468 UnderlyingCount(C) == UnderlyingCount(T) & | |
5469 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5470 | |
5471 **Updates**:: | |
5472 | |
5473 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5474 TypeOf(%vN) = T; | |
5475 | |
5476 **Examples**:: | |
5477 | |
5478 96:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f0(i32 %p0, i32 %p1) { | |
5479 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5480 104:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5481 106:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5482 116:0| 3: <1, 2> | i1: | |
5483 118:4| 3: <4, 3> | %c0 = i1 1; | |
5484 121:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5485 | | %b0: | |
5486 124:0| 3: <29, 3, 2, 1> | %v0 = select i1 %c0, i32 %p0, | |
5487 | | i32 %p1; | |
5488 128:0| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v0; | |
5489 130:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
5490 | |
5491 | |
5492 Call Instructions | |
5493 ----------------- | |
5494 | |
5495 The *call* instruction does a function call. The call instruction is used to | |
5496 cause control flow to transfer to a specified routine, with its incoming | |
5497 arguments bound to the specified values. When a return instruction in the called | |
5498 function is reached, control flow continues with the instruction after the | |
5499 function call. If the call is to a function, the returned value is the value | |
5500 generated by the call instruction. Otherwise no result is defined by the call. | |
5501 | |
5502 If the *tail* flag is associated with the call instruction, then the :ref:`PNaCl | |
5503 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` is free to perform tail call | |
5504 optimization. That is, the *tail* flag is a hint that may be ignored by the | |
5505 PNaCl translator. | |
5506 | |
5507 There are two kinds of calls: *direct* and *indirect*. A *direct* call calls a | |
5508 defined :ref:`function address<link_for_function_address_section>` (i.e. a | |
5509 reference to a bitcode ID of the form ``%fF``). All other calls are *indirect*. | |
5510 | |
5511 Direct Procedure Call | |
5512 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
5513 | |
5514 The direct procedure call calls a defined :ref:`function | |
5515 address<link_for_function_address_section>` whose :ref:`type | |
5516 signature<link_for_function_type>` returns type void. | |
5517 | |
5518 **Syntax**:: | |
5519 | |
5520 TAIL call void @fF (T1 A1, ... , TN AN); <A> | |
5521 | |
5522 **Record**:: | |
5523 | |
5524 AA: <34, CC, F, AA1, ... , AAN> | |
5525 | |
5526 **Semantics**: | |
5527 | |
5528 The direct procedure call calls a define function address ``%fF`` whose type | |
5529 signature return type is void. The arguments ``A1`` through ``AN`` are passed | |
5530 in the order specified. The type of argument ``AI`` must be type ``TI`` (for all I, | |
5531 1 <=I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is optional. If it is included, it must be the | |
5532 literal ``tail``. | |
5533 | |
5534 The types of the arguments must match the corresponding types of the function | |
5535 signature associated with ``%fF``. The return type of ``%f`` must be void. | |
5536 | |
5537 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
5538 | |
5539 ====== == | |
5540 TAIL CC | |
5541 ====== == | |
5542 "" 0 | |
5543 "tail" 1 | |
5544 ====== == | |
5545 | |
5546 **Constraints**:: | |
5547 | |
5548 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5549 N >= 0 & | |
5550 TypeOfFcn(%fF) == void (T1, ... , TN) & | |
5551 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= N | |
5552 | |
5553 **Updates**:: | |
5554 | |
5555 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5556 | |
5557 **Examples**:: | |
5558 | |
5559 72:0| 3: <8, 3, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
5560 | | void @f0(i32, i64, i32); | |
5561 ... | |
5562 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
5563 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5564 124:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5565 126:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5566 136:0| 3: <1, 2> | i64: | |
5567 138:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i64 1; | |
5568 141:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5569 | | %b0: | |
5570 144:0| 3: <34, 0, 4, 2, 1, 2> | call void | |
5571 | | @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %c0, i32 %p0); | |
5572 150:2| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5573 152:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5574 | |
5575 Direct Function Call | |
5576 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
5577 | |
5578 The direct function call calls a defined function address whose type signature | |
5579 returns a value. | |
5580 | |
5581 **Syntax**:: | |
5582 | |
5583 %vN = TAIL call RT %fF (T1 A1, ... , TM AM); <A> | |
5584 | |
5585 | |
5586 **Record**:: | |
5587 | |
5588 AA: <34, CC, F, AA1, ... , AAM> | |
5589 | |
5590 **Semantics**: | |
5591 | |
5592 The direct function call calls a defined function address ``%fF`` whose type | |
5593 signature returned is not type void. The arguments ``A1`` through ``AM`` are | |
5594 passed in the order specified. The type of argument ``AI`` must be type ``TI`` | |
5595 (for all I, 1 <= I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is optional. If it is included, it must | |
5596 be the literal ``tail``. | |
5597 | |
5598 The types of the arguments must match the corresponding types of the function | |
5599 signature associated with ``%fF``. The return type must match ``RT``. | |
5600 | |
5601 Each parameter type ``TI``, and return type ``RT``, must either be a primitive t ype, | |
5602 or a vector type. If the parameter type is an integer type, it must either be | |
5603 i32 or i64. | |
5604 | |
5605 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
5606 | |
5607 ====== == | |
5608 TAIL CC | |
5609 ====== == | |
5610 "" 0 | |
5611 "tail" 1 | |
5612 ====== == | |
5613 | |
5614 **Constraints**:: | |
5615 | |
5616 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5617 N >= 0 & | |
5618 TypeOfFcn(%fF) == RT (T1, ... , TN) & | |
5619 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5620 IsFcnArgType(TI) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5621 IsFcnArgType(RT) & | |
5622 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5623 | |
5624 **Updates**:: | |
5625 | |
5626 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5627 TypeOf(%vN) = RT; | |
5628 | |
5629 **Examples**:: | |
5630 | |
5631 72:0| 3: <8, 2, 0, 1, 0> | declare external | |
5632 | | i32 @f0(i32, i64, i32); | |
5633 ... | |
5634 116:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function i32 @f1(i32 %p0) { | |
5635 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5636 124:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5637 126:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5638 136:0| 3: <1, 1> | i64: | |
5639 138:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i64 1; | |
5640 141:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5641 | | %b0: | |
5642 144:0| 3: <34, 0, 4, 2, 1, 2> | %v0 = call i32 | |
5643 | | @f0(i32 %p0, i64 %c0, i32 %p0); | |
5644 150:2| 3: <34, 1, 4, 1> | %v1 = tail call i32 @f1(i32 %v0); | |
5645 155:0| 3: <10, 2> | ret i32 %v0; | |
5646 157:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
5647 | |
5648 Indirect Procedure Call | |
5649 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
5650 | |
5651 The indirect procedure call calls a function using an indirect function address, | |
5652 and whose type signature is assumed to return type void. It is different from | |
5653 the direct procedure call because we can't use the type signature of the | |
5654 corresponding direct function address to type check the construct. | |
5655 | |
5656 **Syntax**:: | |
5657 | |
5658 TAIL call void V (T1 A1, ... , TN AN); <A> | |
5659 | |
5660 **Record**:: | |
5661 | |
5662 AA: <44, CC, TV, VV, AA1, ... , AAN> | |
5663 | |
5664 **Semantics**: | |
5665 | |
5666 The indirect call procedure calls a function using value ``V`` that is an indire ct | |
5667 function address, and whose type signature is assumed to return type void. The | |
5668 arguments ``A1`` through ``AN`` are passed in the order specified. The type of | |
5669 argument ``AI`` must be type ``TI`` (for all I, 1 <= I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is | |
5670 optional. If it is included, it must be the literal ``tail``. | |
5671 | |
5672 Each parameter type ``TI`` (1 <= I <= N) must either be a primitive type, or a | |
5673 vector type. If the parameter type is an integer type, it must either be i32 | |
5674 or i64. | |
5675 | |
5676 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
5677 | |
5678 ====== == | |
5679 TAIL CC | |
5680 ====== == | |
5681 "" 0 | |
5682 "tail" 1 | |
5683 ====== == | |
5684 | |
5685 The type signature of the called procedure is assumed to be:: | |
5686 | |
5687 void (T1, ... , TN) | |
5688 | |
5689 It isn't necessary to define this type in the :ref:`types | |
5690 block<link_for_types_block_section>`, since the type is inferred rather than | |
5691 used. | |
5692 | |
5693 **Constraints**:: | |
5694 | |
5695 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5696 N >= 0 & | |
5697 TV = TypeID(void) & | |
5698 AbsoluteIndex(V) >= NumFuncAddresses & | |
5699 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= N & | |
5700 IsFcnArgType(TI) for all I, 1 <= I <= N | |
5701 | |
5702 **Updates**:: | |
5703 | |
5704 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5705 | |
5706 **Examples**:: | |
5707 | |
5708 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
5709 48:0| 3: <1, 3> | count 3; | |
5710 50:4| 3: <2> | @t0 = void; | |
5711 52:2| 3: <7, 32> | @t1 = i32; | |
5712 55:4| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1> | @t2 = void (i32); | |
5713 59:4| 0: <65534> | } | |
5714 ... | |
5715 92:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function void @f0(i32 %p0) { | |
5716 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5717 100:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5718 102:4| 1: <65535, 11, 2> | constants { // BlockID = 11 | |
5719 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | i32: | |
5720 114:4| 3: <4, 2> | %c0 = i32 1; | |
5721 117:0| 0: <65534> | } | |
5722 | | %b0: | |
5723 120:0| 3: <44, 0, 2, 0, 1> | call void %p0(i32 %c0); | |
5724 125:4| 3: <10> | ret void; | |
5725 127:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5726 | |
5727 Indirect Function Call | |
5728 ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^ | |
5729 | |
5730 The indirect function call calls a function using a value that is an indirect | |
5731 function address. It is different from the direct function call because we can't | |
5732 use the type signature of the corresponding literal function address to type | |
5733 check the construct. | |
5734 | |
5735 **Syntax**:: | |
5736 | |
5737 %vN = TAIL call RT V (T1 A1, ... , TM AM); <A> | |
5738 | |
5739 **Record**:: | |
5740 | |
5741 AA: <34, CC, RRT, VV, AA1, ... , AAM> | |
5742 | |
5743 **Semantics**: | |
5744 | |
5745 The indirect function call calls a function using a value ``V`` that is an | |
5746 indirect function address, and is assumed to return type ``RT``. The arguments | |
5747 ``A1`` through ``AM`` are passed in the order specified. The type of argument `` AI`` | |
5748 must be type ``TI`` (for all I, 1 <= I <= N). Flag ``TAIL`` is optional. If it is | |
5749 included, it must be the literal ``tail``. | |
5750 | |
5751 Each parameter type ``TI`` (1 <= I <= M), and return type ``RT``, must either be a | |
5752 primitive type, or a vector type. If the parameter type is an integer type, it | |
5753 must either be i32 or i64. | |
5754 | |
5755 TAIL is encoded into calling convention value ``CC`` as follows: | |
5756 | |
5757 ====== == | |
5758 TAIL CC | |
5759 ====== == | |
5760 '' 0 | |
5761 'tail' 1 | |
5762 ====== == | |
5763 | |
5764 The type signature of the called function is assumed to be:: | |
5765 | |
5766 RT (T1, ... , TN) | |
5767 | |
5768 It isn't necessary to define this type in the :ref:`types | |
5769 block<link_for_types_block_section>`, since the type is inferred rather than | |
5770 used. | |
5771 | |
5772 **Constraints**:: | |
5773 | |
5774 AA == AbbrevIndex(A) & | |
5775 RRT = TypeID(RT) & | |
5776 VV = RelativeIndex(V) & | |
5777 M >= 0 & | |
5778 AbsoluteIndex(V) >= NumFcnAddresses & | |
5779 TypeOf(AI) == TI for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5780 IsFcnArgType(TI) for all I, 1 <= I <= M & | |
5781 IsFcnArgType(RT) & | |
5782 N == NumValuedInsts | |
5783 | |
5784 **Updates**:: | |
5785 | |
5786 ++NumValuedInsts; | |
5787 TypeOf(%vN) = RT; | |
5788 | |
5789 **Examples**:: | |
5790 | |
5791 40:0| 1: <65535, 17, 2> | types { // BlockID = 17 | |
5792 48:0| 3: <1, 6> | count 6; | |
5793 50:4| 3: <7, 32> | @t0 = i32; | |
5794 53:6| 3: <3> | @t1 = float; | |
5795 55:4| 3: <4> | @t2 = double; | |
5796 57:2| 3: <21, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2> | @t3 = i32 (i32, float, double); | |
5797 62:6| 3: <21, 0, 0, 1, 2> | @t4 = i32 (float, double); | |
5798 67:4| 3: <2> | @t5 = void; | |
5799 69:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5800 ... | |
5801 104:0| 1: <65535, 12, 2> | function | |
5802 | | i32 | |
5803 | | @f0(i32 %p0, float %p1, | |
5804 | | double %p2) { | |
5805 | | // BlockID = 12 | |
5806 112:0| 3: <1, 1> | blocks 1; | |
5807 | | %b0: | |
5808 114:4| 3: <44, 0, 3, 0, 2, 1> | %v0 = call i32 | |
5809 | | %p0(float %p1, double %p2); | |
5810 120:6| 3: <10, 1> | ret i32 %v0; | |
5811 123:2| 0: <65534> | } | |
5812 | |
5813 .. _link_for_memory_blocks_and_alignment_section: | |
5814 | |
5815 Memory Blocks and Alignment | |
5816 =========================== | |
5817 | |
5818 In general, variable and heap allocated data are represented as byte addressable | |
5819 memory blocks. Alignment is always a power of 2, and defines an expectation on | |
5820 the memory address. That is, an alignment is met if the memory address is | |
5821 (evenly) divisible by the alignment. Note that alignment of 0 is never allowed. | |
5822 | |
5823 Alignment plays a role at two points: | |
5824 | |
5825 * When you create a local/global variable | |
5826 | |
5827 * When you load/store data using a pointer. | |
5828 | |
5829 PNaClAsm allows most types to be placed at any address, and therefore can | |
5830 have alignment of 1. However, many architectures can load more efficiently | |
5831 if the data has an alignment that is larger than 1. As such, choosing a larger | |
5832 alignment can make load/stores more efficient. | |
5833 | |
5834 On loads and stores, the alignment in the instruction is used to communicate | |
5835 what assumptions the :ref:`PNaCl translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` can | |
5836 make when choosing the appropriate machine instructions. If the alignment is 1, | |
5837 it can't assume anything about the memory address used by the instruction. When | |
5838 the alignment is greater than one, it can use that information to potentially | |
5839 chose a more efficient sequence of instructions to do the load/store. | |
5840 | |
5841 When laying out data within a variable, one also considers alignment. The reason | |
5842 for this is that if you want an address to be aligned, within the bytes defining | |
5843 the variable, you must choose an alignment for the variable that guarantees that | |
5844 alignment. | |
5845 | |
5846 In PNaClAsm, the valid load/store alignments are: | |
5847 | |
5848 =========== ============== | |
5849 Type Alignment | |
5850 =========== ============== | |
5851 i1 1 | |
5852 i8 1 | |
5853 i16 1 | |
5854 i32 1 | |
5855 i64 1 | |
5856 Float 1, 4 | |
5857 Double 1, 8 | |
5858 <4 x i1> not applicable | |
5859 <8 x i1> not applicable | |
5860 <16 x i1> not applicable | |
5861 <16 x i8> 1 | |
5862 <8 x i16> 2 | |
5863 <4 x i32> 4 | |
5864 <4 x float> 4 | |
5865 =========== ============== | |
5866 | |
5867 Note that only vectors do not have an alignment value of 1. Hence, they can't be | |
5868 placed at an arbitrary memory address. Also, since vectors on ``i1`` can't be | |
5869 loaded/stored, the alignment is not applicable for these types. | |
5870 | |
5871 .. _link_for_intrinsic_functions_section: | |
5872 | |
5873 Intrinsic Functions | |
5874 =================== | |
5875 | |
5876 Intrinsic functions are special in PNaClAsm. They are implemented as specially | |
5877 named (external) function calls. The purpose of these intrinsic functions is to | |
5878 extend the PNaClAsm instruction set with additional functionality that is | |
5879 architecture specific. Hence, they either can't be implemented within PNaClAsm, | |
5880 or a non-architecture specific implementation may be too slow on some | |
5881 architectures. In such cases, the :ref:`PNaCl | |
5882 translator<link_for_pnacl_translator>` must fill in the corresponding | |
5883 implementation, since only it knows the architecture it is compiling down to. | |
5884 | |
5885 Examples of intrinsic function calls are for concurrent operations, atomic | |
5886 operations, bulk memory moves, thread pointer operations, and long jumps. | |
5887 | |
5888 It should be noted that calls to intrinsic functions do not have the same | |
5889 calling type constraints as ordinary functions. That is, an intrinsic can use | |
5890 any integer type for arguments/results, unlike ordinary functions (which | |
5891 restrict integer types to ``i32`` and ``i64``). | |
5892 | |
5893 See the :doc:`PNaCl bitcode reference manual<pnacl-bitcode-abi>` for the full | |
5894 set of intrinsic functions allowed. Note that in PNaClAsm, all pointer types to | |
5895 an (LLVM) intrinsic function is converted to type i32. | |
5896 | |
5897 .. _link_for_support_functions_section: | |
5898 | |
5899 Support Functions | |
5900 ================= | |
5901 | |
5902 Defines functions used to convert syntactic representation to values in the | |
5903 corresponding record. | |
5904 | |
5905 SignRotate | |
5906 ---------- | |
5907 | |
5908 The SignRotate function encodes a signed integer in an easily compressible | |
5909 form. This is done by rotating the sign bit to the rightmost bit, rather than | |
5910 the leftmost bit. By doing this rotation, both small positive and negative | |
5911 integers are small (unsigned) integers. Therefore, all small integers can be | |
5912 encoded as a small (unsigned) integers. | |
5913 | |
5914 The definition of SignRotate(N) is: | |
5915 | |
5916 ======== ============= ========= | |
5917 Argument Value Condition | |
5918 ======== ============= ========= | |
5919 N abs(N)<<1 N >= 0 | |
5920 N abs(N)<<1 + 1 N < 0 | |
5921 ======== ============= ========= | |
5922 | |
5923 .. _link_for_absolute_index_section: | |
5924 | |
5925 AbsoluteIndex | |
5926 ------------- | |
5927 | |
5928 Bitcode IDs of the forms ``@fN``, ``@gN``, ``%pN``, ``%cN``, and ``%vN``, are | |
5929 combined into a single index space. This can be done because of the ordering | |
5930 imposed by PNaClAsm. All function address bitcode IDs must be defined before any | |
5931 of the other forms of bitcode IDs. All global address bitcode IDs must be | |
5932 defined before any local bitcode IDs. Within a function block, the parameter | |
5933 bitcode IDs must be defined before constant IDs, and constant IDs must be | |
5934 defined before instruction value IDs. | |
5935 | |
5936 Hence, within a function block, it is safe to refer to all of these | |
5937 bitcode IDs using a single *absolute* index. The absolute index for | |
5938 each kind of bitcode ID is computed as follows: | |
5939 | |
5940 ========== =================================================================== | |
5941 Bitcode ID AbsoluteIndex | |
5942 ========== =================================================================== | |
5943 @tN N | |
5944 @fN N | |
5945 @gN N + NumFcnAddresses | |
5946 @pN N + NumFcnAddresses + NumGlobalAddresses | |
5947 @cN N + NumFcnAddresses + NumGlobalAddresses + NumParams | |
5948 @vN N + NumFcnAddresses + NumGlobalAddresses + NumParams + NumFcnConsts | |
5949 ========== =================================================================== | |
5950 | |
5951 .. _link_for_relative_index: | |
5952 | |
5953 RelativeIndex | |
5954 ------------- | |
5955 | |
5956 Relative indices are used to refer to values within instructions of a function. | |
5957 The relative index of an ID is always defined in terms of the index associated | |
5958 with the next value generating instruction. It is defined as follows:: | |
5959 | |
5960 RelativeIndex(J) = AbsoluteIndex(%vN) - AbsoluteIndex(J) | |
5961 | |
5962 where:: | |
5963 | |
5964 N = NumValuedInsts | |
5965 | |
5966 AbbrevIndex | |
5967 ----------- | |
5968 | |
5969 This function converts user-defined abbreviation indices to the corresponding | |
5970 internal abbreviation index saved in the bitcode file. It adds 4 to its | |
5971 argument, since there are 4 predefined internal abbreviation indices (0, 1, 2, | |
5972 and 3). | |
5973 | |
5974 ========= ============== | |
5975 N AbbrevIndex(N) | |
5976 ========= ============== | |
5977 undefined 3 | |
5978 %aA A + 4 | |
5979 @aA A + 4 | |
5980 ========= ============== | |
5981 | |
5982 Log2 | |
5983 ---- | |
5984 | |
5985 This is the 32-bit log2 value of its argument. | |
5986 | |
5987 BitSizeOf | |
5988 --------- | |
5989 | |
5990 Returns the number of bits needed to represent its argument (a type). | |
5991 | |
5992 ======= ================ | |
5993 T BitSizeOf | |
5994 ======= ================ | |
5995 i1 1 | |
5996 i8 8 | |
5997 i16 16 | |
5998 i32 32 | |
5999 i64 64 | |
6000 float 32 | |
6001 double 64 | |
6002 <N X T> N * BitSizeOf(T) | |
6003 ======= ================ | |
6004 | |
6005 UnderlyingType | |
6006 -------------- | |
6007 | |
6008 Returns the primitive type of the type construct. For primitive types, the | |
6009 *UnderlyingType* is itself. For vector types, the base type of the vector is the | |
6010 underlying type. | |
6011 | |
6012 UnderlyingCount | |
6013 --------------- | |
6014 | |
6015 Returns the size of the vector if given a vector, and 0 for primitive types. | |
6016 Note that this function is used to check if two vectors are of the same size. | |
6017 It is also used to test if two types are either primitive (i.e. UnderlyingCount | |
6018 returns 0 for both types) or are vectors of the same size (i.e. UnderlyingCount | |
6019 returns the same non-zero value). | |
6020 | |
6021 IsInteger | |
6022 --------- | |
6023 | |
6024 Returns true if the argument is in {i1, i8, i16, i32, i64}. | |
6025 | |
6026 IsFloat | |
6027 ------- | |
6028 | |
6029 Returns true if the argument is in {``float``, ``double``}. | |
6030 | |
6031 IsVector | |
6032 -------- | |
6033 | |
6034 Returns true if the argument is a vector type. | |
6035 | |
6036 IsPrimitive | |
6037 ----------- | |
6038 | |
6039 Returns true if the argument is a primitive type. That is:: | |
6040 | |
6041 IsPrimitive(T) == IsInteger(T) or IsFloat(T) | |
6042 | |
6043 IsFcnArgType | |
6044 ------------ | |
6045 | |
6046 Returns true if the argument is a primitive type or a vector type. Further, | |
6047 if it is an integer type, it must be i32 or i64. That is:: | |
6048 | |
6049 IsFcnArgType(T) = (IsInteger(T) and (i32 = BitSizeOf(T) | |
6050 or i64 == BitSizeOf(T))) | |
6051 or IsFloat(T) or IsVector(T) | |
6052 | |
6053 .. _link_for_abbreviations_section: | |
6054 | |
6055 Abbreviations | |
6056 ============= | |
6057 | |
6058 Abbreviations are used to convert PNaCl records to a sequence of bits. PNaCl | |
6059 uses the same strategy as `LLVM's bitcode file format | |
6060 <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_. See that document for more | |
6061 details. | |
6062 | |
6063 It should be noted that we replace LLVM's header (called the *Bitcode Wrapper | |
6064 Format*) with the bytes of the :ref:`PNaCl record | |
6065 header<link_for_header_record_section>`. In addition, PNaCl bitcode files do | |
6066 not allow *blob* abbreviation. | |
6067 | |
6068 .. _link_for_abbreviations_block_section: | |
6069 | |
6070 Abbreviations Block | |
6071 ------------------- | |
6072 | |
6073 The abbreviations block is the first block in the module build. The | |
6074 block is divided into sections. Each section is a sequence of records. Each | |
6075 record in the sequence defines a user-defined abbreviation. Each section | |
6076 defines abbreviations that can be applied to all (succeeding) blocks of a | |
6077 particular kind. These abbreviations are denoted by the (global) ID of the form | |
6078 *@aN*. | |
6079 | |
6080 In terms of `LLVM's bitcode file format | |
6081 <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_, the abbreviations block is called a | |
6082 *BLOCKINFO* block. Records *SETBID* and *DEFINE_ABBREV* are the only records | |
6083 allowed in PNaCl's abbreviation block (i.e. it doesn't allow *BLOCKNAME* and | |
6084 *SETRECORDNAME* records). | |
6085 | |
6086 TODO | |
6087 ---- | |
6088 | |
6089 Extend this document to describe PNaCl's bitcode bit sequencer | |
6090 without requiring the reader to refer to `LLVM's bitcode file | |
6091 format <http://llvm.org/docs/BitCodeFormat.html>`_. | |
OLD | NEW |